JP6166665B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention executes a variable display game that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information based on a winning of a game ball at a start winning opening, and a predetermined result is given to a player when the result of the variable display game is a special result. The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state that gives a gaming value of.

  As a conventional gaming machine, based on the fact that a game ball wins at a start opening provided in a game area, a variable display game is displayed in which a plurality of identification information is displayed in a variable manner. There is a gaming machine configured to be able to generate a special gaming state that gives a player a gaming value when it becomes a result mode.

  Further, in such a gaming machine, the random number value extracted at the time of starting winning is compared with the determination value (starting memory pre-reading determination), and the result is displayed before the variable display game based on the starting winning is executed. There is known a gaming machine that performs a suggestion effect (prefetching effect, continuous notice effect, etc.) (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In addition, there are currently gaming machines that have two start prize openings in the game area, for example, these two start prize openings have different values and winning statuses, and variable display based on winnings at one of the start prize openings. Some games are configured to run preferentially regardless of the winning order (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

JP 2004-290254 A JP 2008-18000 A

  However, in a gaming machine such as that described in Patent Document 2, if an effect based on pre-reading determination as in Patent Document 1 is performed, there is a contradiction in the effect, which reduces the player's expectation and interest. was there.

  An object of the present invention is to enhance the interest of games.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 executes a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner based on winning of a game ball in a start winning opening, and results of the variable display game In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state that gives a player a predetermined gaming value when
The probability state in which the special result occurs includes a normal probability state and a high probability state higher than the normal probability state, and is configured to generate the high probability state after the special gaming state ends.
Based on the winning of the game ball at the starting winning opening, the right to execute the variable display game can be stored as a starting memory up to a predetermined upper limit number, and a starting random number corresponding to the starting storage is stored Storage means;
Random numbers acquired in correspondence with the start memory before the variable display game based on the start memory is executed , the determination value corresponding to the normal probability state and the determination value corresponding to the high probability state And a pre-determining means for generating a pre-determination result by making a determination based on
A prior notice directing means capable of executing a prior notice directing ,
Before article before announcement attraction means,
Read the predetermination result information including the predetermination result by the predetermination means and information that can identify the probability state that brings the predetermination result from the storage area of the predetermination result information,
When the read prior determination result information is information indicating that a special result occurs only in the high probability state, regardless of whether or not the variable display game based on the start-up memory becomes the special result The lottery for the preliminary announcement effect is performed by replacing the value of the read preliminary determination result information with the value of the result that does not become the special result.

  According to the first aspect of the present invention, it is possible to prevent the production from being inconsistent due to the change in the probability state, thereby reducing the player's expectation and interest, and improving the interest of the game.

  According to the present invention, the interest of games can be enhanced.

It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart explaining an initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart explaining an input process. It is a flowchart explaining a switch reading process. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining a winning opening switch / state monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining fraud & winning prize monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart explaining a gaming machine state check process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout busy signal check process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure start port switch common process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure pending | holding information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining prefetch big hit judgment processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure usual process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure usual process transfer setting process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a change start information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure change process transition setting process (special figure 1). It is a flowchart explaining a special figure change process transition setting process (special figure 2). It is a flowchart explaining the special figure variation process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure display process transition setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure display process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure display process. It is a flowchart explaining the high probability variation frequency update process. It is a flowchart explaining a production mode information check process. 10 is a flowchart for explaining fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1; It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 1 in a small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare / interval process. It is a flowchart explaining a process shift setting process during a special winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening residual ball process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening remaining ball process. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 2 during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process. It is a flowchart explaining jackpot end setting processing 1. It is a flowchart explaining jackpot end setting processing 2. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure usual process transfer setting process 2. FIG. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the process for small hitting fanfare, and (b) is a flowchart for explaining the process for setting transition for small hitting process. It is a flowchart explaining a middle hit process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit operation | movement transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit remaining ball process transfer setting process. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the small hit remaining ball process, (b) is a flowchart for explaining the small hit end process shift setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit end process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure usual process transfer setting process 3. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining a production command setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a design fluctuation control process. It is a flowchart explaining a distribution process. It is a flowchart explaining a 2 byte distribution process. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart explaining a received command check process. It is a flowchart explaining a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart explaining prefetch symbol type command processing. It is a flowchart explaining prefetch fluctuation system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining a prefetch lottery process. It is a flowchart explaining a variable system command process. It is a flowchart explaining a change production setting process. It is a flowchart explaining prefetch effect promotion determination processing. It is a figure explaining the example of a display with a display apparatus. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit system command processing in the 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the change production setting process in a 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the prefetch effect reset process in a 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the prefetch lottery process in a 1st modification. It is a figure explaining the example of a display with the display apparatus in a 1st modification. It is a figure explaining the example of a display with the display apparatus in a 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the fluctuation production setting process in a 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the single system type command processing in a 3rd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the power failure recovery setting process in a 3rd modification. It is a front view of the game board in the 4th modification. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of the game machine in a 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 1 in a 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure game process in a 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure start port switch common process in a 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process in a 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure display middle process in a 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure display middle process in a 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit start setting process in a 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the fanfare 1 middle process transfer setting process in a 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the fanfare 2 / interval process transition setting process 1 in a 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the (a) process in fanfare 1 in a 4th modification, (b) The flowchart explaining the process transition setting process in waiting for gate passage. It is a flowchart explaining the gate waiting process in a 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the fanfare 2 / interval process in a 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process during the big prize opening opening in the 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special winning opening open process in a 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning opening residual ball process transfer setting process in a 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning opening residual ball process in a 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the fanfare 2 / inter-interval process transition setting process 2 in the fourth modification. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit end process transfer setting process in a 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit end process in a 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit end setting process 1 in the 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit end setting process 2 in the 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process in a 5th modification. It is a figure explaining the decoration special drawing command in a 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the gate waiting process in a 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the fanfare 2 / inter-interval process transition setting 1 in the fifth modification.

  DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

  The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be capable of opening and closing. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. In addition, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

  In addition, lamps and LEDs are incorporated in the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 to provide decorations, effects, and notifications when abnormalities occur (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamps and LEDs are abnormally notified colors (for example, red) The frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (flashing)), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effects) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormality content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. Note that a discharge abnormality notification lamp may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, at the lower part of the front frame 12, there is an upper plate 21 (storage tray) for supplying game balls to a not-shown hitting ball launcher, and game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10. There are provided an upper tray ball outlet 22 that flows out, a lower tray (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls paid out in a state where the upper tray 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launcher, and the like. Further, an effect button 25 having a built-in effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player is provided on the upper edge of the upper plate 21. In addition, a touch panel 29 for receiving a touch operation input from the player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25. Further, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.
In the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25, A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

  Further, to the right of the production button 25, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a discharge button that is operated to discharge the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28. A balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card is provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the player turns the operation unit 24 so that the ball-striking device feeds the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. Fire. Further, when the player operates the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, an effect or the like in which the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decoration special map variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). It can be carried out.

  Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

  On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by the guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, a center case (game production component) 40 provided with a display device 41 is arranged substantially at the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recessed portion provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 surrounds the display area of the display device 41, protrudes forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and is formed so as to make it difficult for a game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or a CRT (CRT). In an area (display area) where an image of the display screen can be displayed, information relating to a game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), a character that produces a special figure variation display game, and a background image that enhances the presentation effect is displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special diagram variation display game is played. In addition, an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.
In addition, the left and right portions of the center case 40 are provided with a board effect device 44 that produces an effect of a game by operating. The board effect device 44 is operable from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

On the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (common figure start gate) 34 for providing a start condition for the normal figure change display game is provided. A game ball won in the usual start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).
In the game area 32, three general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40, and one general winning prize is on the lower right side of the center case 40 and below the normal start gate 34. A mouth 35 is arranged. The game balls that have won the general prize opening 35 are detected by a prize opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

  In addition, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start winning opening 36 (first start winning opening, start winning area) for providing a start condition for the special figure variation display game is provided. The game ball won in the start winning opening 36 is detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

Also, an ordinary variation winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting winning area) for providing a start condition for the special figure variation display game is provided immediately below the starting winning opening 36.
The normal variation winning device 37 includes a movable member 37b that can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in by opening in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted to the near side. A closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) in which a game ball cannot flow is maintained. When the result of the normal variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, a game ball is likely to flow into the normal variation winning device 37 by a general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a drive device. It can be changed to a state (a state advantageous to the player). A game ball won in the normal variation winning device 37 is detected by the start port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).
Also, below the normal variation winning device 37, an out port 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a winning port or the like is provided.

Further, in the game area 32, below the center case 40 and on the right side of the start winning opening 36, a special variation that can be converted into a state in which a game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A winning device (large winning opening) 38 is provided.
The special variation winning device 38 has an attacker-type open / close door 38c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the front side, and depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. The state is converted from a closed state (closed state unfavorable for the player) to an open state (a state advantageous to the player). That is, the special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, a large winning opening that is opened and closed by an open / close door 38c that is driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device. During the state, it is possible to facilitate the inflow of game balls into the big prize opening by converting the big prize opening from the closed state to the open state, and to give a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player It has become. Note that a large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3) is provided inside the large winning opening (winning area) as detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the large winning opening. . In the gaming machine of this embodiment, two big prize opening switches 38a are provided, and a game ball that has flowed into the big prize opening is detected by any of the big prize opening switches 38a. In this way, by providing a plurality of special winning opening switches 38a, it is possible to quickly detect a game ball that has flowed into the special winning opening.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the game areas 32 where the game balls flow down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left game area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right game area. ing. Then, the player can aim for winning at the start winning opening 36 by adjusting the firing force and firing the game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed), and launch the game ball to the right game area (so-called By right-handing), it is possible to aim to win the normal start gate 34, the normal variation winning device 37, and the special variable winning device 38.
Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end portion of the center case 40 is disposed at a position corresponding to the right game area, and is fired to the right game area. The played game ball is configured to pass through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42. The material of at least the front surface of the flow path forming member 42 is a material that allows a game ball passing through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42 to be visually recognized from the outside. A game ball passing through the flow path formed by the forming member 42 (that is, a game ball flowing down the right game area) can be viewed through the flow path forming member 42 from the front of the flow path forming member 42. .

  In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, in the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the general figure start gate 34 which form the special figure fluctuation display game are displayed. There is provided a collective display device 50 for displaying a game of variable display with a win as a trigger and displaying various information.

The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 1 display) 51 and a second special figure for a first special figure fluctuation display game configured by a 7-segment display (LED lamp) or the like. The second special figure fluctuation display part (special figure 2 display) 52 for the fluctuation display game, the fluctuation display part (general figure display) 53 for the common figure fluctuation display game composed of LED lamps, and the LED lamp Storage display units 54, 55, and 56 for informing the start memory number of each variable display game.
Further, the collective display device 50 includes a first game state display unit (first game state display unit, right-handed notification unit) 57 for notifying that a right-handed game state is more advantageous than a left-handed game. The second gaming state display unit (second gaming state indicator, time shortening state notifying unit) 58 that lights up when the state occurs to notify the occurrence of the short time state, and the jackpot probability state when the game machine 10 is turned on is a high probability state A third game state display unit (third game state display unit, probability state display unit) 59 for displaying that the game is in progress, and a round display unit 60 for displaying the number of rounds at the time of the big hit (number of times the special variable winning device 38 is opened and closed) Is provided.
The collective display device 50 may be further provided with a display unit (display) that lights up when a big hit occurs and notifies the occurrence of the big hit.

The special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is, for example, during the execution of the fluctuation display game, that is, while the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is being performed on the display device 41, The segment is blinked to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to 100 milliseconds, for example. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, in addition to the central segment, the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment is also blinked to change. It is configured to display that it is inside.
When the result of the game is “out of”, for example, the central segment is turned on as a result mode of out of game, and when the result of the game is “win”, the result of out of game (special result mode) is not. A game result is displayed with a result form (for example, a number or a symbol) other than the result form turned on.

  The normal display 53 displays the game result as a lighting mode or a lighting color according to the game result after a predetermined time, by blinking the lamp during the change and displaying the change. In addition, the general figure hold display 56 displays the start memory number (= holding number) of the general figure start gate 34 which is the variation start condition of the general figure display 53 by turning off, blinking, and turning on a plurality of LEDs. The special figure 1 holding display 54 displays the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = holding number) out of the number of winning balls to the start winning opening 36, which is the variation start condition of the special figure 1 display 51, by a plurality of LEDs. Displayed by turning off, flashing, or turning on. The special figure 2 hold indicator 55 indicates the start memory number (= hold number) of the second start winning opening (ordinary variable prize winning device 37), which is the fluctuation start condition of the special figure 2 indicator 52, and turns off the plurality of LEDs. Displayed by blinking and lighting.

  The first gaming state display unit (right-handed notification unit) 57 is configured by an LED lamp or the like, and turns off the lamp when the gaming state is advantageous to the player when the left-handed player is more advantageous than the right-handed player. When the game state is more advantageous for the player to the right than the left strike, the lamp is turned on.

  The second game state display unit (time-short state notifying unit) 58 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and in a normal game state where the time-short state does not occur (when the variable time shortening function is not activated), the lamp is turned off. When the time-short state occurs (when the variable time shortening function is activated), the lamp is turned on.

  The third gaming state display unit (probability state display unit) 59 is configured by an LED lamp or the like, and when the jackpot probability state is a low probability state (normal probability state) when the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the lamp is turned off. In the case where the big hit probability state is a high probability state (probability variation state) when the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the lamp is turned on.

  The round display unit 60 is configured by an LED lamp or the like. For example, the lamp is turned off when the game is not in a special game state, and the lamp corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result is displayed during the special game state. Turn it on. Note that the round display unit may be a seven-segment display.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) from a launcher (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by means of direction change members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various locations in the game area 32, and the normal start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35 The winning prize opening 36, the normal variable prize winning device 37 or the special variable prize winning device 38 is won, or it flows into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. When a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37 or the special variable winning device 38, the number of winning balls corresponding to the type of the winning winning port is changed to the payout control device 200 ( From the dispensing unit controlled by FIG. 3), the glass frame 15 is discharged to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23.

  On the other hand, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the general diagram start gate 34 is provided in the general diagram start gate 34. When a game ball that has been driven into the area 32 passes through the usual figure start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a and a usual figure change display game is played. In addition, the normal variation display game cannot be started, for example, the normal variation display game has already been played and the normal variation display game has not been completed, If 37 is converted to the open state and the game ball passes through the general figure start gate 34, the general figure start memory number is added if the number is less than the upper limit number (for example, four) +1), and one ordinary start memory is stored. The memorized number of the usual figure start winnings is displayed on the universal figure holding display 56 of the collective display device 50. In addition, a random number value for hit determination (win random number value) for determining the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is stored in the normal chart start memory, and this random number value for hit determination is determined as a determination value. To determine the result of the normal map display game. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the normal variation display game is won and a specific result mode (normal map specific result) is derived.

  The usual figure change display game is provided in the collective display device 50 and is displayed on a change display portion (common figure display) 53 constituted by LEDs. Makes identification information (general, normal). The general map display 53 is composed of a display device, and for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc. are used as normal identification information. After this is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined time, the result is displayed in a stopped state. You may do it. If the stop display of the usual figure change display game is a usual figure specifying result, it becomes a hit of the ordinary figure, and the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened for a predetermined time. This makes it easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening inside the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the number of times the second special figure changing display game is executed increases.

  The winning ball to the starting winning port 36 and the winning ball to the normal variation winning device 37 are respectively detected by the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a provided inside. A game ball won in the start winning opening 36 is detected as a start winning ball of the first special figure variation display game, and is stored as a first start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4), and normally fluctuates. The game ball that has won the winning device 37 is detected as a start winning ball of the second special figure variation display game, and is stored as a second start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four). Further, when detecting the starting winning ball, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted as starting storage information, and the extracted random number value is stored in the game control device 100 (see FIG. 3). Are stored in the special figure storage area (a part of the RAM) as a special figure start memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of four times). The number stored in the special chart start memory is displayed on the storage display section (the special figure 1 hold display 54, the special figure 2 hold display 55) for notifying the start winning number of the collective display device 50, and the center. Also on the display device 41 of the case 40, it is displayed as a decorative special figure start memory display.

  The game control device 100 receives the special prize 1 display 51 (variation display device) or the special figure 2 display 52 (variation display) based on the winning winning opening 36 or the normal variable prize winning device 37, or the starting memory thereof. The first or second special figure variation display game is played on the device. The first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are performed by variably displaying a plurality of special symbols (special figures, identification information) and then stopping and displaying a predetermined result form. In addition, a decorative special figure variation display game is displayed in which a display device (image display device) 41 displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) in a variable manner. And as a result of the special figure fluctuation display game, when the display form of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes a special result form (special result), a special game state ( So-called big hit state). Correspondingly, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 is also a special result mode. Further, when the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes the small hit result mode as a result of the special figure change display game, a small hit game state (so-called so-called game condition) , A small hit state). Correspondingly, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 is also the small hit result mode.

  For example, in the decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the numbers and the like described above on the display device 41 is changed to the left variation display region (first special symbol), the right variation display region ( In each of the second special symbol) and the middle fluctuation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is displayed in a variable manner (high-speed fluctuation) at a speed that is difficult to identify. Then, the symbols that have changed after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped in the order of the left variation display region, the right variation display region, and the middle variation display region, and stopped in each of the left variation display region, the right variation display region, and the middle variation display region. This is done by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result form constituted by the displayed identification information. In addition, the display device 41 performs a variable display game with a special decoration pattern corresponding to the number of special figure starting memories, and various effect displays such as the appearance of a character are performed to improve interest.

  The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be separate displays or the same display, but each special figure variation display is performed so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. The game is displayed. In addition, the display device 41 may use different display devices and different display areas in the first special map variable display game and the second special map variable display game, or use the same display device and display area. However, the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. The game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41. Further, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. That is, when there is a start memory of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the special figure fluctuation display game can be executed, the second special figure fluctuation display game is It is to be executed (executed with priority).

  In addition, in the state where the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) can be started and the number of start memories is zero, the start winning opening 36 (or the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37) is entered. When the game ball wins, the start memory is stored as the start right is generated, the start memory number is incremented by 1, and the first special figure variation display game (second special figure) is immediately added based on the start memory. (Variable display game) is started, and at this time, the start memory number is decremented by one. On the other hand, a state in which the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) cannot be started immediately, for example, the first or second special figure fluctuation display game has already been performed, and the special figure fluctuation display game has ended. If the game ball is won in the start winning opening 36 (or the normal variable winning device 37) in the state of not being played, in the special game state or in the small hit game state, if the start memory number is less than the upper limit number, The start memory number is incremented by 1, and one start memory is stored. Then, in a state where the starting memory number is 1 or more, the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) can be started (the end of the previous special figure fluctuation display game or the special game state, At the end of the small hit gaming state), the start memory number is decremented by 1, and the first special figure variation display game (second special figure variation display game) is started based on the stored start memory. In the following description, when the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure fluctuation display game.

  Although not limited in particular, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the big winning port switch 38a is a non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that includes a coil for magnetic detection and detects a game ball using a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. ing. In addition, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 and the like of the gaming machine 10 and the body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 and the like include a micro switch having a mechanical contact. Can be used.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for comprehensively controlling games, and a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 111 is provided. CPU section 110, input section 120 having an input port, output section 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., CPU section 110, data bus 140 connecting between input section 120 and output section 130, etc. .

  The CPU section 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and receives a clock that serves as a reference for the CPU operation clock, timer interrupt, and random number generation circuit. An oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 to be generated is included. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 so as to be operable. Is done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 includes a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates the DC 32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power source, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC 12V and DC 5V from the DC 32V voltage, and the like. Unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying power supply voltage to the RAM inside the gaming microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal.

  In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, the main control device 100. You may comprise so that it may provide on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in this embodiment. By providing this, it is possible to reduce the cost by removing it from the object of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly, the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to, for example, 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.
That is, the game control device 100 serves as a game control information storage and holding means that can store and hold game control information related to game control at the time of the power failure when the power failure occurs in the gaming machine.

  Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When this RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number judgment values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area for the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. Used as As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

  In addition, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the production contents, and the presence or absence of the reach state. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory. The variation pattern table includes a loss variation pattern table selected when the result is lost, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include a table for determining the second half fluctuation pattern that is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (such as the second half fluctuation group table and the second half fluctuation pattern selection table), and the fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining a first-half variation pattern as a pattern (first-half variation group table, first-half variation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player (special gaming state) when the special result mode is entered, the game is already derived at the stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed. This means a display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the display device's variable display control progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. For example, a state where so-called full-rotation reach is performed in a variable display region while maintaining a state in which special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to reach a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode.

  Thus, for example, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game displayed on a display device corresponding to a special figure fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the display of the result mode is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, the condition that becomes the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas (for example, the same The state in which the identification information is obtained (except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  This reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expectation value is different). As a reach effect, normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, this reach state is included in a variable display mode at least in a case where a special result mode is derived in a special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of date). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state that is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and the display device, thereby playing the gaming machine. 10 overall control is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure fluctuation display game (various patterns Random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern game execution time in the variable display of reach and non-reach fluctuation display, and hit random numbers for determining the hit of the usual variable display game And a clock generator for generating a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. Yes.

  Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one variation pattern table from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (winning (big hit or small hit) or off) or the probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special figure changing display game as the current gaming state. State), the operation state (short-time operation state) of the normal variation winning device 37 as the current gaming state, the starting memory number, etc., and selects one variation pattern table from among a plurality of variation pattern tables. Get. Here, when executing the special figure variation display game, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100, thereby Control to make it pay out. In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball.

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, a starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, It is connected to the gate switch 34a in the usual start gate 34, the winning opening switch 35a, and the large winning opening switch 38a of the special variable winning apparatus 38, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 7V. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 that receives a logic signal and converts it into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V is provided. The proximity I / F 121 has an input range of 7V-11V, so that the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected to float. It is possible to detect an abnormal state such as, and output an abnormality detection signal.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 38a are input to the second input port 123. . Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. In addition, the third input port 124 has a detection signal of the fraud detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or a glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10. The detection signal of the switch 63 and the detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 are also input. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and the detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

  Of the outputs from the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main board 100 to the test test apparatus (not shown) via the relay board 70. Furthermore, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36 a and the start port 2 switch 37 a among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121 are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for normal IC operation. It has become.

  The data held in the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

  The input unit 120 also includes a fraud radio signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output when the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detects radio waves), a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 is a signal indicating whether or not a command can be received), a payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating a payout abnormality), a shot ball cut switch signal (a signal indicating a lack of game balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full), a touch switch signal (input to a touch switch provided on the operation unit 24) A first input port 122 is provided which takes in a signal based on the data bus 140 and supplies the signal to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

  Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like. The Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is directly output to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test board. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to each port 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. However, immediately before the reset signal RESET is input, each data of the input unit 120 is reset. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control apparatus 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control apparatus 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. The one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 via a relay board 70 for data indicating special symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating the probability status of jackpot. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (a mass-produced / sold product) installed in the game store. A detection signal output from the proximity I / F 121, such as a start port switch, that is not required to be processed is supplied to the test test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals that cannot be supplied to the test firing test apparatus as they are, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the gaming machine controls the game. An error signal indicating that the state is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

  Further, the output unit 130 includes a solenoid (large winning port solenoid) 38b connected to the data bus 140 for opening the special variable winning device 38 and a solenoid (general power solenoid) 37c for opening the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37. A second output port 134 is provided for outputting the opening / closing data. In addition, the output unit 130 includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON / OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the contents displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and stores information about the gaming machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives a switching data signal of the special prize opening solenoid 38b and the general power solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid driving signal 138a. The second driver 138b for outputting the ON / OFF drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and the current of the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136 A third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for the lead-in digit line, and a fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 71 Is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Also, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  A dynamic drive method is achieved by flowing a current to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and drawing the current through the segment line from the cathode terminal by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 1 so that the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. Note that the buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 through serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using a serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 is for displaying video on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 and the main control microcomputer 311, similarly to the game microcomputer 111. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing the image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling output of sound for reproducing various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing a program executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 providing a work area, and stored contents even when power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. An FeRAM 323 that can be held is connected to an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.). A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, decides the contents of the presentation and instructs the contents of the output video to the VDP 312, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce the sound, lights the decoration lamp, motors And control of solenoid drive control and production time management.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. The VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

  From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 and lighting of the decoration lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. The VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive commands and data from the interrupt control signals INT0 to n and the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT and the like are also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 storing sound data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier that drives an upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and a lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An ornamental special figure holding number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 via this command I / F 331 are produced as a production control command signal (production command ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function. Yes.

  The effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15. Frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 and the like) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) and board effects provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). There is provided a board effect movable body control circuit 334 that drives and controls the device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. Note that a frame effect device having a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor that operates an effect device) is provided on the glass frame 15, and a frame effect movable body control circuit that drives and controls the frame effect device is provided. good.

  Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25 a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. The function of detecting the on / off state of the effect actor switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting the sound and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 And a switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply apparatus 400 drives a motor or a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control apparatus 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V, display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motors and LEDs, and DC5V as the power supply voltage for command I / F 331, a voltage of DC15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers is generated. Is configured to do. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC − for generating DC 3.3 V or DC 1.2 V based on DC 5 V is used. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device into a reset state. In addition, VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), tone generator LSI 314, amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving speakers, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling lamps, motors, and the like in a form output from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. In addition, a cooling FAN 45 that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven in a state in which the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
The CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random number value for hit determination of the normal figure based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided to the normal figure start gate 34, and the ROM 111B. Is compared with the determination value stored in the table, and a process of determining a missed hit of the normal game display game is performed. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the universal symbol display device, a process for displaying the universal symbol variation display game to be stopped is performed. When the result of the normal map change display game is a win, a special result mode corresponding to each of the first per stop symbol to the third per stop symbol is displayed on the general diagram display, and the general electric solenoid 37c is operated. The movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 is controlled to be opened as described above for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds). That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal map change display game is out of control, control is performed to display the result form of the shift on the general map display.

  Further, a start winning (starting memory) is stored based on an input of a detection signal of a game ball from a starting port 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning port 36, and based on this start memory, the first special figure variation display game is stored. The big hit determination random number value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining a miss of the first special figure variation display game is performed. In addition, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37, and based on this start memory, for the big hit determination of the second special figure variable display game A random number value is extracted and compared with a determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining a miss of the second special figure variation display game is performed.

  Then, the CPU 111 </ b> A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination results of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, a process for displaying a special figure fluctuation display game to be stopped is performed. In other words, the game control unit 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the start winning area (the first start winning opening 36, the normal variable winning apparatus 37). Make.

  In addition, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 performs a process of displaying the decoration special figure change display game corresponding to the special figure change display game. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the production state setting, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the process of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. That is, the production control device 300 serves as production control means for controlling production related to a game (such as a variable display game).

  Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode and the small hit result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit. In addition, processing for generating a special gaming state or a small hit gaming state is performed. In the process of generating the special game state or the small hit game state, for example, the CPU 111A can open the open / close door 38c of the special variable prize device 38 by the big prize opening solenoid 38b and allow the game ball to flow into the big prize opening. Control is performed. Then, until the condition that either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the grand prize opening or a predetermined openable time elapses from the opening of the big prize opening is achieved. A control (cycle game) is performed in which the release is set as one round, and this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening / closing control means for performing control for opening / closing the special winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result form of the deviation.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a gaming state after the special gaming state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This high probability state is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the normal probability state. Moreover, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result aspect of any of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

  In addition, the game control device 100 is capable of generating a short time state (a specific game state, a general figure high probability state) as a game state after the special game state is ended, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this short state, the probability that the hit result of the normal map change display game (normal map probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal low probability state) of 0 (normal high probability state). Is possible. As a result, control is performed so that the opening time of the normal variation winning device 37 per unit time is longer than when the normal variation winning device 37 is in the normal low probability state. Here, in the normal variation winning device 37 in the present embodiment, the normal probability is set to 0 so that the movable member 37b is not opened in the normal gaming state.

  Also, in the short time state, the execution time of the normal map change display game (the normal map change time) is, for example, 500 milliseconds, and the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map change display game is, for example, 600 milliseconds. When the normal variation winning game 37 is released as a result of the normal variation display game being won, the first stop symbol opening time (general power release time) and the number of releases (for example, 500 msec × 1), Opening time (general power opening time) of the second per stop symbol and the number of times of opening (for example, 1700 msec × 2 times), opening time of the third per stop symbol (general power opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 1700 ms ×) 3 times).

  In addition, the execution time of the general map variable display game, the general map stop time, the number of general power releases, and the general power open time are appropriately set so as to control the normal map variable display game and the normal variable winning device 37 to be in the short-time operation state. For example, in the short-time state, it is possible to control the execution time of the above-described normal variation display game (ordinary variation time) to be the second variation display time shorter than the first variation display time. (For example, 10,000 milliseconds is 1000 milliseconds). Further, in the short time state, it is possible to control the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map change display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 milliseconds). 704 ms). Also, in the short-time state, when the normal variation winning game 37 is released as a result of the normal-variation display game being won, the opening time (general power open time) is set to the normal state (low-probability state) It is possible to control so that the second opening time is longer than one opening time (for example, 100 msec is 1352 msec). In the short-time state, the number of times of opening of the normal variation winning device 37 (the number of times of normal power release) is greater than the number of times of opening the first time (for example, 2 times) with respect to the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the number of times of opening (for example, 4 times) to the second opening number. Also, in the short-time state, the probability that the hit result of the normal-variable display game (normal-probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal low-probability state, for example, 1/251) in the normal operation state. Probability (usually high probability state, eg 250/251) is possible.

  In the short-time state, the normal variation winning device 37 is in an open state by changing any one or more of the normal time fluctuation time, the normal time stop time, the number of normal power releases, the normal power release time, and the normal figure probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-short states that are different from each other. Moreover, when it is a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first release mode and the second release mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.

  Hereinafter, control of the gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. Control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes main processing shown in FIGS. 5 and 6 and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 9 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 milliseconds).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 6, first, the process of prohibiting an interrupt (step S1) is performed, and then the start address of the area in which the value of a register or the like is saved when an interrupt occurs. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of the present embodiment, the RAM address range is 0000h to 01FFh, the upper order is 00h or 01h, and the top 00h is set in step S4. Next, a firing stop signal is output to set the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (step S5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6), and processing for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of slave control means (for example, payout control apparatus 200 or effect control apparatus 300) that performs various controls in accordance with instructions from the game control apparatus 100 serving as the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 is first started up, and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) is started up. Can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. A standby means for setting the standby time is provided.

  In addition, the power-on delay timer is counted using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to validity determination) that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). Thereby, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area.

  Note that an initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and the operation of the initialization switch 112 is reliably performed by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time. It can be detected. In other words, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from when the power is turned on until the standby time elapses. It is necessary to continue doing. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by operating immediately after turning on the power without performing such troublesome operations. Can be prevented from being accepted.

  After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step S7), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12). First, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via the port and the data bus and the number of times (for example, twice) to be checked is set (step S8) to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (step S9).

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9). If the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power supply of the gaming machine is waited to be cut off. In this way, it is possible to prevent a power outage from being erroneously detected due to noise, etc. by determining that a power outage has occurred when the power outage monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, and appropriately deal with problems at power-on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of power-on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shut-off are retained, so backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here There is no need. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control burden can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and the timer value is 0? Is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the value of the timer is 0 (step S12; Y), that is, if the standby time has expired, access to a readable / writable RWM (read / write memory) such as a RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step S13). ), Off-data is output to all output ports (set to a state in which there is no output) (step S14).

  Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111 and used in this embodiment for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200) is set (step S15) and read first. Whether the initialization switch has been turned on is determined from the state of the first input port 122 (step S16).

  When the initialization switch is off (step S16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step S17). If so (step S17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S18). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S19). It is determined whether or not the checksums match (step S20). If the checksums match (step S20; Y), the process proceeds to step S21 in FIG.

  Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step S16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17; N or step S18; N). If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S20; N), the process proceeds to step S26 in FIG. 6 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch constitutes an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make.

  In step S21 of FIG. 6, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. Undefined state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined. Thereafter, an area for storing the game state in the RWM is examined to determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step S22). Here, when the special figure is not in high probability (step S22; N), steps S23 and S24 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S25. On the other hand, when the special figure is in a high probability (step S22; Y), the on-information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23), for example, a high probability notification LED (error display) provided in the collective display device 50, for example. Data) is saved in the segment area (step S24). And the command at the time of the power failure restoration corresponding to the process number prepared in order to perform the special figure game process mentioned later reasonably is transmitted to an effect control board (effect control apparatus 300) (step S25), and step S31 Proceed to In the case of the present embodiment, in step S25, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a screen designation command (a customer waiting demonstration screen command if waiting for a customer, otherwise) If so, send multiple commands such as recovery screen commands). Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted.

  On the other hand, when jumping from step S16, S17, S18, S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibited area is set to access permitted (step S26), and all the areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step S27), and the RAM access prohibition area is set to access prohibition (step S28). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S29). The area to be initialized here is an area relating to the setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. And the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to an effect control board (effect control apparatus 300) (step S30), and it progresses to step S31. In this embodiment, in step S30, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (a customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed and a predetermined time ( A plurality of commands such as a command for informing the RAM initialization with light and sound (for example, for 30 seconds) are transmitted. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted.

  In step S31, a process of starting a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111A performs setting of a code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set. Bit transposition pattern is a method of permutation when the extracted random bit arrangement (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) is replaced in a predetermined order and stored as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that defines By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may arbitrarily set it.

  Thereafter, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on are extracted, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, random numbers for determining the hit pattern of the special figure) RWM as the initial value (start value) of (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), random number that determines the hit of the normal figure (per random number), random number that determines the hit symbol of the normal figure (per hit random number) After saving to the area (step S33), the interruption is permitted (step S34). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain illegal random numbers.

  Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step S35) is performed for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the winning symbol random number are generated using random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. It is configured as follows. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU. The big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, This is a “low-speed counter” that is updated on the basis of a CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing as a unit. In addition, in the big hit design random number, the small hit design random number, the hit random number, and the hit design random number, each time the random number makes a round, the initial value random number (generated by software) is used to change the start value. Is adopted. Each random number may be a counter update by +1 or −1, or may be a random update in which all values within the range appear without overlapping until one round is reached. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number update process in step S35, the number of times (for example, twice) for reading and checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S36), It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S35). That is, when no power failure has occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S35) (step S34), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is executed preferentially. Can be prevented from being interrupted by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

  The initial value random number update process in step S35 includes a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. In order to avoid execution of the value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to cancel the interrupt. If the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed in the main process and only the main process is performed, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. There is an advantage that it is simplified.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, processing for temporarily prohibiting interruption (step S39), all A process of outputting off data to the output port (step S40) is performed.

  Thereafter, the power failure inspection region check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection region 1 (step S41), and the power failure inspection region check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection region 2 (step S42). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating a checksum when the RWM is powered off, and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step S44), a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step S45). ) And wait for the gaming machine to be turned off. In this way, the check data is saved in the power failure inspection area and the checksum at the time of power shutoff is calculated to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shut down is properly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

  From the above, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) for overall control of the game, and the slave control means (payout control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control apparatus) for setting a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

  The power supply device 400 includes a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received over a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

  Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of being operated from the outside, and the operation of the initialization operation unit. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111C, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.

  Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 7 shows the checksum calculation process (steps S19 and S43) in the main process described above. In this checksum calculation process, first, the head address of the RWM is set as the start value of the calculated address (step S51), the number of repetitions is set (step S52), and “0” is set as the calculated value (step S53). . The number of bytes of RAM used is set as the number of repetitions.

  Thereafter, a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is set as a new calculated value (step S54), the calculated address is updated by +1 (step S55), the number of repetitions is updated by -1 (step S56), and a checksum is obtained. It is determined whether the calculation of has been completed (step S57). If the calculation has not been completed (step S57; N), the process returns to step S54 and the above processing is repeated. If the calculation is completed (step S57; Y), the checksum calculation process ends.

[Initial value random number update processing]
FIG. 8 shows the initial value random number update process (step S35) in the main process described above. In this initial value random number update process, first, the big hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S61), and the small hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S62). Then, the winning initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S63), the winning symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S64), and the initial value random number updating process is terminated.
Here, the “big hit symbol initial value random number” is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure variation display game, and the “small hit symbol initial value random number” is the small bonus of the special symbol variation display game It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the stop symbol. In addition, “Round initial value random number” is a random number that is the initial value of a random number that determines the hit of the normal variation display game, and “Hit symbol initial value random number” is a random number that determines the hit stop symbol of the normal variation display game It is a random number that is the initial value. In this way, the randomness of the random number can be improved by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time permits in the main process.
Naturally, the small hit design random number does not exist in a model without a small hit. In addition, depending on the model, there is a gaming machine in which a random symbol initial value does not exist.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 9, the timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 9 is started.

  When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is designated (step S101). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register saving process in which a value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main process) is transferred to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same processing as step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing (step S103) is performed to input from various sensors and switches and to acquire signals, that is, to read the state of each input port. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step S104) for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 38b, general electric solenoid 37c) or the like is performed. Note that when a signal for stopping the firing is output in step S5 in the main process, a signal for permitting the firing is output by performing this output process, and the launch permitting signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. In addition, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating a launch permission state viewed from the game control device, and a second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the launch permission state viewed from the payout control device is also a payout control. Generated in the device and output to the launch controller. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

  Next, a payout command transmission process (step S105), a random number update process 1 (step S106), and a random number update process 2 (step S107) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control apparatus 200 are performed. After that, it is monitored whether there is a normal signal input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the usual gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 38a, and error monitoring ( A prize opening switch / state monitoring process (step S108) is performed to determine whether the front frame or the glass frame is open. Also, a special figure game process (step S109) for performing a process related to the special figure variation display game and a general figure game process (step S110) for performing a process related to the common figure variation display game are performed.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step S111), which is provided in the gaming machine 10 and drives a segment LED that displays special information variation display game and various information related to the game to display desired contents, magnetic sensor 61 Magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112) that performs a process of checking the detection signal from the panel to determine whether there is an abnormality, and a panel radio wave fraud that performs a process of checking the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 to determine whether there is an abnormality A monitoring process (step S113) is performed. Then, external information editing processing (step S114) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer is performed, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated.
Here, in the present embodiment, the process for restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process for allowing the interrupt) and the process for restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process for designating the register bank 0) Automatically at the time of the timer interrupt processing. Depending on the CPU used, there is a gaming machine that needs to instruct execution of processing for restoring the interrupt disabled state and processing for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (step S103) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 10, in the input process, first, the state of the switch detection signal taken into the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step S121). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 1), the state of that bit is cleared (step S122).

  Subsequently, the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S123), and the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step S124). ), The address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step S125). Thereafter, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 2), the bit data is prepared (step S126), and if there is a bit to be inverted in the 8-bit port (input port 2), the bit data is prepared. Is prepared (step S127), and a switch reading process (step S128) is performed. Here, “preparation” in this embodiment means setting a value in a register, but is not limited thereto, and a value may be set in an RWM or other memory.

  Next, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step S129), and the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step S130). Thereafter, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 3), the bit data is prepared (step S131), and if there is a bit to be inverted in the 8-bit port (input port 3), the bit data is prepared. Is prepared (step S132), a switch reading process (step S133) is performed, and the input process is terminated.

Note that unused bit data and bit data to be inverted are prepared for each input port.
Therefore, the unused bit data of the input port 2 prepared in step S126 and the unused bit data of the input port 3 prepared in step S131 are different data. As a result, there is a possibility that the data has the same value. is there.
In addition, the bit data to be inverted of the input port 2 prepared in step S127 and the bit data to be inverted of the input port 3 prepared in step S132 are different data. is there.

[Switch read processing]
Next, details of the switch reading process (steps S128 and S133) in the above-described input process will be described. As shown in FIG. 11, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step S141). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step S142), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S143), and then the port input state 1 of the target switch control area Is saved (stored) (step S144). After that, it waits for a delay time (for example, about 100 μsec) to pass until the second reading (step S145).

  When the delay time elapses, a second reading of the state of the signal taken into the target input port is performed (step S146). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step S147), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S148), and then the port input state 2 of the target switch control area Is saved (stored) (step S149). After that, a definite bit pattern is created in which the same bit is 1 in the first and second readings, and a different bit is 0 (step S150), and the logical product of the definite bit pattern and port input state 2 is calculated. The confirmation bit is set (step S151).

  Next, an undetermined bit pattern is created in which the bit having the same state in the first and second readings is set to 0, and a different bit is set to 1 (step S152). The product is taken and used as the previous held bit (step S153). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state from which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like is removed. Then, the current fixed bit and the previous held bit are combined and saved as the current finalized state (step S154), the exclusive OR of the previous and current finalized state is taken and saved as the rising edge (step S155). The switch reading process ends.

  When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reading is performed once for each interrupt process and compared with the result of the previous reading. Although there is a method of determining whether or not there has been a change, in such a case, if the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, there is a possibility that correct determination cannot be performed. On the other hand, it is possible to avoid the above-described problem by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference as in the present embodiment.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (step S104) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 12, in the output process, first, off data is output (reset) to the output port 135 that outputs the segment data of the batch display device (LED) 50 (step S161). Next, the data to be output to the output port 134 for outputting the data of the ordinary electric solenoid 37c and the special winning opening solenoid 38b is synthesized and output (step S162).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 is updated (step S163), and the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (step S163). S164). In the present embodiment, the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 3. Next, the acquired data and external information data are combined (step S165), and the combined data (for example, “door / frame open” data, “security signal” data) is output to the digit / external information output port. It outputs to 136 (step S166).
Thereafter, the segment line output data is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the digit counter value (step S167), and the loaded data is output to the segment output output port 135 (step S168). In the present embodiment, for example, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the general figure display 53, the special figure 1 hold display 54 and the special figure 2 hold display 55, and the general figure hold display are displayed. The device 56, the round display unit 60, the second game state display unit 58, and the third game state display unit 59 are dynamically lit.

  Subsequently, various output data of external information is synthesized (step S169), and the synthesized data (for example, “big hit signal 1” data, “big hit signal 2” data, “big hit signal 3” data, “big hit signal” 4 ”,“ design determination frequency signal ”data,“ start port signal ”data,“ main prize ball signal ”data) and firing permission output data are synthesized (step S170). The information is output to the output port 137 for outputting external information / firing permission signal (step S171). Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step S172). Thereafter, the data output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S173).

  Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step S174). Further, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70. (Step S175). Then, the data output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step S176), the output process is terminated.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (step S105) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 13, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181).

  The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The winning number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out a prize ball, and a prize for which a payout command has not yet been transmitted. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 serves as a prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to a prize ball command.

  The winning number counter area 2 is for transmitting a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of winning balls (scheduled number of payouts) generated by winning a winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). The winning data corresponding to the winning ball which is the area to be used and for which the main winning ball signal generation processing is not performed is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 serves as a main winning ball signal counter capable of storing information related to the main winning ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, a payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control apparatus 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). By checking these two signals, it is possible to monitor unauthorized payout.

Each of these winning number counter areas has a winning number counter area for each of the number of winning balls set for each winning opening (in this embodiment, three winning balls, ten winning balls, and 14 winning balls). Is provided, and the count number in the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by 1 based on winning in the winning opening. That is, information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. Note that a larger area than the winning number counter area 2 is assigned to the winning number counter area 1 so that more winning data can be stored. This is because the main award ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the transmission destination, whereas the payout command may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 that is the transmission destination. This is because data may be accumulated.
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, up to 65535 winnings can be stored in the 3 prize ball counter area, 10 prize ball counter area, and 14 prize ball counter area of the winning number counter area 1, respectively. The 3 prize ball counter area, the 10 prize ball counter area, and the 14 prize ball counter area of the winning number counter area 2 are configured to be able to store up to 255 prizes respectively.

  In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, “0” is displayed in the winning number counter area to be checked. Judge whether there is any count number. If there is no count number (step S181; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is checked whether the counting numbers of all the winning number counter areas have been checked. Determination is made (step S183). If it is determined that all checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the process proceeds to step S192. On the other hand, if it is determined that all checks have not been completed (step S183; N), the process returns to step S181 and the above processing is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter areas → 10 prize ball counter areas → 14 prize ball counter areas.

  If it is determined in step S181 that there is a count number (step S181; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S184), and the target winning number counter area 2 is updated. The number of payouts corresponding to the address is acquired (step S185). Then, the value of the winning ball remaining area and the acquired payout number are added (step S186), and the addition result is saved in the winning ball remaining area (step S187). As the value of the remaining prize ball area before this processing, a fraction that does not satisfy a predetermined number that is a reference for output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

Thereafter, 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S188), and it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S189). If it is not 0 or more (step S189; N), the process proceeds to step S192. If it is 0 or more (step S189; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output count area is updated by +1 (step S190). That is, every time the remaining number of prize balls reaches 10, the number of outputs of the main prize ball signal is updated by +1.
Then, the subtraction result is saved in the award ball remaining number area (step S191), and the process returns to step S188. As a result, the main winning ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out as a result of winning a game ball to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. . By outputting the main prize ball signal, when game ball payouts such as during big hits are concentrated, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed with the payout of game balls, and the exact generated during the big hit is delayed. It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of prize balls cannot be counted.
Here, the process of steps S181 to S191 is a process of updating (increasing) the number of outputs of the main prize ball signal, and the process of steps S192 to S201 is a process of transmitting a payout command.

  In step S192, if the payout command transmission timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become "0" (step S193). If the payout command transmission timer is not “0” (step S193; N), the payout command transmission process is terminated. If the payout command transmission timer is “0” (step S193; Y), the payout busy signal flag is checked to determine whether the payout busy signal is busy (step S194).

  The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control. If the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is turned on (busy state). Is done. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not a payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal is a status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control.

  If the payout busy signal is busy (step S194; Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. That is, in this embodiment, instead of transmitting a payout command for each timer interruption, a predetermined time has elapsed (the value of the payout command transmission timer becomes 0), and the payout control device 200 side can pay out a prize ball. In the state, the payout command is transmitted. In this way, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start payout control and does not transmit a payout command, it is possible to perform useless processing by not performing subsequent processing relating to the transmission of the payout command. To prevent and reduce the burden of control.

  Conditions for the payout busy signal to be in the on state (busy state) include, for example, during a payout operation, a ball lending operation, a shot ball outage error, an overflow error, a frame radio fraud occurrence, a payout ball detection switch (paid out The number of award balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control device 200 during an abnormal state of a switch for monitoring a ball, an underpayment error, an excessive payout error, or the number of unpaid award balls = the number of game balls remaining ), Etc. (when not = 0).

  If the payout busy signal is not busy (step S194; N), it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195). In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, “0” is displayed in the winning number counter area to be checked. Judge whether there is any count number.

  If there is no count number (step S195; N), the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S196), and it is checked whether the counting numbers of all the winning number counter areas have been checked. Determination is made (step S197). If it is determined that all checks have been completed (step S197; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that all checks have not been completed (step S197; N), the process returns to step S195 and the above process is repeated. In the case of this embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter areas → 10 prize ball counter areas → 14 prize ball counter areas.

  If it is determined in step S195 that there is a count number (step S195; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S198), and the target winning number counter area 1 is updated. The payout number command corresponding to the address is acquired (step S199). Then, the acquired payout number command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step S200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S201), and the payout command transmission process is terminated. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and for example, 200 msec is set as an initial value.

  As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one win in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 performs control for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout command. That is, the game control device 100 indicates that the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control can start payout control. A prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting a prize ball command to the payout control means.

  As described above, the game control device 100 performs control to transmit the award ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, so that the award is given only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute payout control. A ball command will be sent. As a result, data corresponding to a winning that has not yet been paid out is held on the game control device 100 side, so that it is backed up by the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs, and is backed up to the payout control device 200. Even if it does not have a function to do so, it is possible to realize accurate payout control.

  In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when a power-off state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its storage means and immediately before power-off. The payout control state based on the data is maintained. However, the conventional gaming machine requires a function for backing up, resulting in a problem of increasing costs. According to the present invention, accurate payout control can be realized without providing the payout control apparatus 200 with a function for backing up.

  Also, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be grasped accurately. Also, since the prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command and the main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information relating to the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball having different transmission timings are provided. Signal information can be managed separately, and information can be managed reliably.

  From the above, the game control is comprehensively performed, and the game balls to the winning areas (the start winning hole 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the general winning port 35, the special variable winning device 38) provided in the gaming area 32 are provided. Game control means (game control apparatus 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on the winning of the game, and payout control means (payout control apparatus) for performing payout control of the game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means 200), and the game control means pays out a prize ball command based on a status signal (busy signal) indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control, which is output from the payout control means. When a power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power failure, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control means, a prize ball command is immediately issued. Pay A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means in response to the state signal indicating that payout control can be started from the payout control means continuously output over a predetermined period without being sent to the control means. It will be like that.

  The game area 32 is provided with a plurality of winning areas with different numbers of winning balls (start winning opening 36, normal variation winning apparatus 37, general winning opening 35, special variable winning apparatus 38), and the game control means (game control apparatus 100) is provided. A prize ball command counter (game control device 100) that can specify whether or not a prize ball command for instructing game ball payout control is transmitted for each prize ball number, and a status signal can start payout control. And when there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the status signal is displayed by the payout control means. Whether or not the payout control can be started is specified before specifying whether or not there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter.

  In addition, the game control is comprehensively performed, and a prize ball command is given based on the winning of a game ball in a predetermined winning area (start winning prize port 36, normal variable prize winning device 37, general prize winning mouth 35, special variable prize winning device 38). Game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting the game, and payout control means (payout control device 200) for performing payout control of the game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. The control means outputs the prize ball command when the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means can start payout control indicates that the payout control can be started. Prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) for sending to the means, and a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal) including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out when a game ball is awarded to a predetermined prize area The gaming machine External information output means (game control device 100) that outputs to the section, the external information output means, whether the status signal output from the payout control means is whether the payout control means can start payout control The prize ball signal is output regardless of whether or not.

  In addition, the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) immediately receives a prize ball command even when a power failure occurs and the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started when the power failure is restored. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and a prize ball command is issued in response to a state in which the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started for a predetermined period of time. This means that it is transmitted to the payout control means.

  Further, the game control means (game control device 100) has a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information relating to a prize ball command and a prize capable of storing information relating to a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control device 100), and a prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) includes a predetermined winning area (start winning prize port 36, normal variation winning prize device 37, general winning prize port 35, special fluctuation). A prize ball command is generated in units of one prize to the prize winning device 38), and when the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started, one prize ball command is issued as the payout control means (payout control device 200). ), And the prize ball command counter (game control device 100) can store information on the winning in units of one winning in the predetermined winning area, and the game in the predetermined winning area Sphere winning And the number of prize ball commands that have not been transmitted can be stored, and the external information output means can store a predetermined winning prize by performing an update corresponding to the transmission of the prize ball command to the payout control means. The prize ball signal counter is configured to accumulate the number of prize balls determined to be paid out when a game ball is awarded to the area, and to output a prize ball signal to the outside of the gaming machine every time the accumulated value reaches a predetermined number. Can store information on the winning in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area, and updates the game ball when winning in the predetermined winning area, and accumulates the number of winning balls by the external information output means By performing the update in correspondence with the processing, it is possible to store the number of prize balls that have not yet been accumulated.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 14 shows the random number update process 1 (step S106) in the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number that are the targets of the initial value random number update process. In this random number update process 1, it is first determined whether or not the big hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S211).
If the big hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S211; N), it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S214). If the big hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S211; Y), the big hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S212), and the next initial value of the loaded big hit symbol random number is handled. A random number counter (random number area) to be set is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds a start value (step S213). Thereafter, it is determined whether the small hit design random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S214).

  If the small hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S214; N), it is determined whether the normal hit random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S217). When the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S214; Y), the small hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S215), and the next initial value of the loaded small hit symbol random number is set. The value is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S216). Thereafter, it is determined whether the normal hit random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S217).

  If the normal random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S217; N), it is determined whether the normal random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S220). Further, when the normal hit random number is waiting for initial value setting (step S217; Y), the hit initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S218), and the next initial value of the loaded normal random hit random number is loaded. The value is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S219). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S220).

  If the normal symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S220; N), the random number update processing 1 is terminated. If the normal symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S220; Y), the initial symbol random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S221), and the loaded normal symbol random number is loaded. The next initial value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S222), and the random number update process 1 is terminated.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 15 shows the random number update process 2 (step S107) in the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 2 is a process for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (variation pattern random number 1) as the variation pattern random numbers. Each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. In addition, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed for different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1 (the reach fluctuation mode determining random number) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is comprised so that.

In this random number update process 2, first, a random number update scan counter for sequentially specifying which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be subjected to the current update process is updated (step S231). In the present embodiment, the value of the random number update scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. When the value of the random number update scan counter is “0”, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (upper) is updated, when it is “1”, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (lower) is updated, and when it is “2”, the fluctuation The pattern random number 2 is updated, and when it is “3”, the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is updated. Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S232).
Next, a random number upper limit determination value is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (step S234). The table to be referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has made a round.

  Subsequently, for example, a CPU used as a gaming microcomputer in the present embodiment is not provided with a refresh register (hereinafter referred to as “R register”) used for DRAM refresh or the like. In addition, a counter called “M1 counter” that operates in the same manner as the R register is built in, but the value of the M1 counter is loaded (step S234). By using the value of the M1 counter, randomness can be given to the random number. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is acquired, and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step S235). Note that the mask value is a bit number that varies depending on the random number to be updated. For example, when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 1 bit of the M1 counter and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 Is updated to the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter. This is because the upper limit varies depending on the type of random number. As a mask value, when the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated. When the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated. Although 4 bits have been exemplified, the numerical value is an example and the present invention is not limited to this.

  Next, it is determined whether the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236). If the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236; Y), the remaining value by masking the value of the M1 counter with the upper 1 byte as a mask value as an addition value (hereinafter referred to as this) Is set to a mask update value obtained by adding “1” to “masked value”, the lower 1 byte is set to “0” (step S237), and the process proceeds to step S239. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236; N), the upper 1 byte is set to “0” and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value as an addition value ( Step S238), the process proceeds to step S239. Note that “1” is added to the masked value because the masked value may be “0”, and if “0” is added later, it does not change from the value before the addition, so this is avoided. is there.

  Then, it is determined whether the random number area to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step S239). If it is a 2-byte random number (step S239; Y), the value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set (step S240). ), The process proceeds to step S242. If the random number area to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step S239; N), “0” is set as the upper 1 byte of the random value, and the value (1 of the random area to be updated is set as the lower 1 byte of the random value. Byte) is set (step S241), and the process proceeds to step S242.

  In step S242, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in step S237 or S238 to the random value is set as a new random value, and it is determined whether the new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in step S233 (step S242). S243). If the new random number value is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step S243; N), the new random value is saved in the random number area below the 1-byte random number or 2-byte random number (step S245). When the new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value (step S243; Y), a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random value is set as a new new random value (step S244). Save in the random number area below the byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step S245).

Next, it is determined whether the updated random number area is a 2-byte random number (step S246). If the updated random number area is not a 2-byte random number (step S246; N), the random number update process 2 is terminated. If it is a 2-byte random number (step S246; Y), a new random value (or a value when a new random number is calculated again) is saved in the random number area above the 2-byte random number (step S247). ), The random number update process 2 is terminated.
In the case of this embodiment, on the effect random number update table, the upper limit judgment value, the mask value of the M1 counter, the type information of the random number area to be updated (1 byte random number, 2 byte random number (upper), 2 byte random number (lower)) The address of the update area is defined for the number of random numbers to be updated (4 blocks).

  In this way, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of FIG. 1 and FIG. Therefore, the CPU 111A determines a variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of game balls into the start area of the start winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37. Random number updating means for updating the fluctuation pattern random number.

[Prize mouth switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 16 shows a winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process. In this winning a prize opening switch / status monitoring process, first, a winning prize monitoring table 1 corresponding to one of the big winning prize opening switches 38a in the special winning prize opening (special variable prize winning device 38) is prepared (step S301), and the big winning prize opening is obtained. In spite of not being opened, an illegal & winning monitoring process (step S302) for monitoring whether or not there is an illegal winning in the big winning opening and detecting a normal winning is executed.

  The winning opening monitoring table includes a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether or not there is an input to the target switch, a lower address of fraud monitoring information, a lower address of an illegal winning number area, an illegal winning error notification command, an illegal winning prize Number upper limit value (number of fraud occurrence determination), address of winning prize switch table, information of notification timer update information (permit / update) are defined. The winning table of the winning mouth monitoring table includes a monitoring switch bit, a lower address of the winning number counter area 1, a winning number counter area 2 for each switch, in addition to the number of monitoring repetitions (the number of switches). The lower address information is defined. The winning opening monitoring table is prepared according to each switch to be monitored.

  Thereafter, a winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other large winning opening switch 38a in the large winning opening (special variable winning apparatus 38) is prepared (step S303), and it is monitored whether there is an illegal winning and a normal winning is made. The detected fraud & prize winning monitoring process (step S304) is executed.

  Next, a winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in the ordinary electric power system is prepared (step S305), and an illegal & winning monitoring process for monitoring whether there is an illegal winning and detecting a normal winning. (Step S306) is executed. Then, a winning opening monitoring table is prepared for a winning opening switch (for example, the starting opening 1 switch 36a or the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) that does not require fraud monitoring processing (step S307), and the number of winnings for which the winning number is updated. Counter update processing (step S308) is performed.

  Next, the state scan counter for sequentially designating which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals to be monitored is to be monitored this time is updated (step S309). In the case of this embodiment, the state scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. Thereafter, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S310). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S311) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

  In the case of this embodiment, referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 1, when the value of the state scan counter is “0”, the switch abnormality output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like The state monitoring based on the 1 signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “1”, the state monitoring based on the shot ball break switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the state scan counter is “2”, state monitoring based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “3”, state monitoring based on the payout abnormality status signal is set. The

  Next, the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S312). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S313) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the state scan counter is referred to the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, and when the value of the state scan counter is “0”, it is based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch 63. The state monitoring is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “1”, the state monitoring based on the signal output from the main body frame open detection switch 64 is set. When the value of the state scan counter is “2”, state monitoring based on the fraud signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “3”, state monitoring based on the touch switch signal is set. Is set.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the state scan counter is “0” (step S314). If the value of the error scan counter is not “0” (step S314; N), the winning prize switch / state monitoring process is performed. finish. In this case, there is no state monitoring target in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 referred to next. In addition, when the value of the error scan counter is “0” (step S314; Y), the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S315), and a gaming machine for judging a state such as whether an error has occurred or not. A state check process (step S316) is performed.

  In the case of this embodiment, referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, when the value of the state scan counter is “0”, the switch abnormality output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like A state monitoring based on two signals is set. The gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is not defined when the state scan counter is “1” to “3”.

  Thereafter, a payout busy signal check process (step S317) for checking a payout busy signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can start payout control is performed, and the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is ended. Note that the processing from step S315 to S317 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is “0”, so that it is executed at a rate of once every four timer interrupts. Become. That is, when the timer interruption is performed every 4 milliseconds, the processing from step S315 to S317 is performed every 16 milliseconds.

[Unauthorized & winning monitoring process]
FIG. 17 shows the fraud & winning monitoring process (steps S302, S304, S306) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process. This fraud & prize winning monitoring process is a process performed on each of the two large prize opening switches 38a of the special variable prize winning device 38 and the start opening 2 switch 37a of the normal variation winning prize device 37. With regard to the big prize opening (special variable prize winning device 38) and the ordinary electric power (ordinary variable prize winning device 37), it is easy to perform an illegal act of forcibly opening the opening / closing member and inserting the game ball to pay out the prize ball. In addition to monitoring fraud.

  In this fraud & prize winning monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning prize switch subject to error monitoring is checked (step S321), and it is determined whether it is during the fraud monitoring period (step S322). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special game state in which the special variable prize device 38 is opened when the prize monitor switch for error monitoring is the large prize prize switch 38a. In the case of the mouth 2 switch 37a, it is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal variation winning device 37 is being executed based on the normal hit.

  If it is the fraud monitoring period (step S322; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target prize opening switch (step S323). When there is no input to the target prize opening switch (step S323; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S332). Further, when there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S323; Y), the target illegal winning number is updated by +1 (step S324), and the updated illegal winning number is equal to or larger than the number of fraud determinations to be monitored. It is determined whether or not there is (step S325).

In the present embodiment, the number of fraud occurrence determinations is set to 5 regardless of the type of winning prize switch to be monitored for error, but the number of fraud occurrences defines a different number for each kind of winning prize switch. You can also.
The number of judgments is set to five. For example, when a large winning opening in an open state is converted to a closed state, a game ball is sandwiched between door members of the large winning opening, and the gaming ball is valid for the large winning opening switch This is to prevent the player from judging that the player has won a prize or the noise has been added to the signal, and not to judge it as an error easily.

  If the number of fraudulent winnings is not equal to or greater than the number of fraud determinations to be monitored (step S325; N), a winning mouth monitoring table for the target winning mouth switch is prepared (step S330). If the number of fraudulent winnings is equal to or greater than the number of fraud determinations to be monitored (step S325; Y), the number of fraudulent winnings is limited to the number of fraud determinations (step S326) and the initial value is stored in the target fraud winning notification timer area. (For example, 60000 milliseconds) is saved (step S327). Next, a target fraud occurrence command is prepared (step S328), a fraud winning flag is prepared as a fraud flag (step S329), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S340). ).

  On the other hand, if it is not during the fraud monitoring period (step S322; N), a winning mouth monitoring table for the target winning mouth switch is prepared (step S330), and a winning number counter updating process (step S331) for setting a winning ball is performed. Do. Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S332), and whether or not the notification timer is permitted to be updated is determined (step S333). If the notification timer update is not permitted (step S333; N), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the notification timer is allowed to be updated (step S333; Y), if the target notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S334). Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero.

  The update of the notification timer is permitted when the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is one large winning port switch 38a, and is not permitted when the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is the other large winning port switch 38a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notification timer from being updated twice as much as the unauthorized notification about the special variation winning device 38 and to be up in half of a specified time (for example, 60000 milliseconds). Note that when the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is the start port 2 switch 37a, the update of the notification timer is always permitted.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step S335). If the value is not 0 (step S335; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the value is 0 (step S335; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, a target fraud cancel command is prepared (step S336), and the fraudulent winning cancel flag is set as the fraud flag. Preparation is made (step S337). And it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S338).

  When it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S338; Y), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the present fraud & winning monitoring process, the target number of illegal winnings is cleared ( In step S339, the prepared illegal flag is compared with the value of the target illegal flag area (step S340). Further, when it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S338; N), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the previous fraud & winning monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is targeted. The value is compared with the value of the illegal flag area (step S340).

  Then, if the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (step S340; Y), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared illegal flag does not match the value of the target illegal flag area (step S340; N), the prepared illegal flag is saved in the target illegal flag area (step S341), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step S342), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. Through the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when an error occurs, and an illegal winning error cancel command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the error is canceled, so that the start and end of error notification are set. Will be.

[Winner counter update process]
FIG. 18 shows the winning number counter update process (steps S308 and S331) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process and fraud & winning monitoring process. In this winning number counter updating process, first, the number of winning port switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning port monitoring table (step S351), and whether or not there is an input to the target winning port switch (more precisely, an input change). Determination is made (step S352).

  If there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step S352; N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all the switches has been completed (step S362). If there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step S353), and the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S354). It is determined whether an overflow occurs (step S355). If no overflow has occurred (step S355; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step S356), and the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). ). When an overflow occurs (step S355; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). In this embodiment, in step S354, the counter for prize balls (payout command transmission) is updated. The counter size is 2 bytes (range 0-65535).

  After the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S358), and it is determined whether it overflows (step S359). If no overflow has occurred (step S359; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step S360), and the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361). Then, it is determined whether monitoring of all the switches has been completed (step S362). If an overflow occurs (step S359; Y), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (step S362). In the present embodiment, in step S358, the counter for the main prize ball signal is updated. The counter size is 1 byte (range 0-255).

  When monitoring of all the switches has not been completed (step S362; N), the process returns to the process of determining whether there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S352). If all the switches have been monitored (step S362; Y), the winning number counter updating process is terminated. As a result of the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on winning in the winning area and the winning information is stored.

[Game machine status check processing]
FIG. 19 shows the gaming machine state check process (steps S311, S313, and S316) in the above-described prize opening switch / state monitoring process. In this gaming machine state check process, first, a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter is acquired (step S371), and it is determined whether the signal to be monitored is on (step S372).

  Information corresponding to the state scan counter is defined in the state monitoring table (the gaming machine state monitoring table prepared in the prize opening switch / state monitoring process). This information includes, for example, the lower address of the start address of the status monitoring area, the lower address of the port input status area of the switch control area where the target signal information is stored, mask data for extracting only the bits of the target signal, and the signal ON judgment data, status off command (in case of error system, error notification end command), status on command (in case of error system, error notification start command), status off monitoring timer comparison value, status on monitoring timer A comparison value is included.

  If the target signal is not on (step S372; N), a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (step S373), and a target state off command is acquired and prepared (step S374). Thereafter, a target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S375), and the value of the target signal control region is compared with the current signal state (step S379). The case where the target signal is not on (step S372; N) is a state indicating that the error signal is not an error (normal), and is a state indicating that the signal from the touch switch is not touched. is there.

  On the other hand, when the target signal is on (step S372; Y), a state on flag is prepared as a state flag (step S376), and a target state on command is acquired and prepared (step S377). Thereafter, a target state on-monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S378), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S379). When the target signal is ON (step S372; Y), this is a state indicating that an error signal is an error (abnormal or illegal), and that the signal from the touch switch is touched. It is the state which shows.

  If the value of the target signal control area matches the current signal state (step S379; Y), that is, if the signal state has not changed, the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S382). Then, it is determined whether the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383). If the value of the target signal control area does not match the current signal state (step S379; N), that is, if the signal state changes, the current signal state is saved in the target signal control area ( Step S380). Then, the target state monitoring timer is cleared (step S381), the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S382), and it is determined whether the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value ( Step S383).

  When the value of the target state monitoring timer is not equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383; N), the gaming machine state check process is terminated. If the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383; Y), the state monitoring timer is updated by -1 and is kept at the comparison value -1 (step S384). The status flag thus set is compared with the value of the target status flag area (step S385).

  When the prepared state flag matches the value of the target state flag area (step S385; Y), the gaming machine state check process is terminated. If the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area do not match (step S385; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step S386), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step S387), and the gaming machine state check process is terminated. Thereby, the state off command prepared in step S374 or the state on command prepared in S377 is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
FIG. 20 shows the payout busy signal check process (step S317) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this payout busy signal check process, first, it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (step S391). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 cannot start payout control.

  If the payout busy signal is on (step S391; Y), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S392), and an on-determined monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 milliseconds) is set (step S393). It is determined whether the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S396). If the payout busy signal is not on (step S391; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S394), and an off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 milliseconds) is set (step S395). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S396). This makes it possible to check whether the same state continues for a plurality of timer interruptions.

  If the value of the busy signal state area does not match the state of the current signal (step S396; N), the current signal state is saved in the busy signal state area (step S397), and the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0. (Step S398), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (Step S399). If the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S396; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S399).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value set in step S393 or step S395 (step S400). If it is not equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S400; N), The payout busy signal check process is terminated. If it is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S400; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1 and is kept at the comparison value -1 (step S401), and prepared in step S392 or step S394. The status flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step S402), and the payout busy signal check process is terminated.

  By this processing, the busy signal status is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time, even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal status is not changed immediately, but the busy signal status is changed when the changed state continues for the signal determination time, and the noise is changed. It is hard to be affected by such as.

  Further, since the busy signal status is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal status is not set and is in an indefinite state until one of the signal states continues for the signal determination time. Thus, when a power failure occurs and the power supply recovers from the power failure, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately issued. In response to the fact that a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period of time, a prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 200. Will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and knows that the payout process can be performed immediately, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It can be prevented from being broken.

[Special Figure Game Processing]
Next, details of the special game process (step S109) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the special figure game process, the input of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

  As shown in FIG. 21, in the special game process, first, a start port switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring a winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball is won in the normal variable winning device 37 that forms the start winning port 36 and the second starting winning port, various random numbers (such as big hit random numbers) are extracted, and a special feature based on the winning is obtained. Prior to the start of the figure variation display game, a game result preliminary determination is performed in which a game result based on a prize is determined in advance.

  Next, a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In the special winning prize switch monitoring process, a process for monitoring the detection of a game ball at the special winning prize switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38 is performed.

  Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure game process timer is “0” (step A4). When the value of the special figure game process timer is “0” (step A4; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, reference is made to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number. The special figure game sequence branch table to be set is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game process number (step A7).

In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “0”, the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the special figure fluctuation display game, the setting of the production, A special figure routine process (step A8) for setting information necessary for the process is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “1”, special figure changing process for setting a special figure stop display time, setting information necessary for performing the special figure display process, etc. (Step A9) is performed.

  In step A7, if the special figure game process number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of the big hit, and the big winning prize opening for each big hit A special chart display process (step A10) is performed for setting the fanfare time according to the release pattern and setting information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval process.

In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “3”, setting of the opening time of the big prize opening, updating of the number of times of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the process during opening of the big prize opening, etc. are performed. Processing during fanfare / interval (step A11) is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “4”, if the big hit round is not the final round, the interval command is set, while if it is the final round, the ending command is set, A special winning opening opening process (step A12) for setting information necessary for performing the ball process is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “5”, if the big hit round is the final round, a process for setting a time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening and a big hit end process are performed. A big winning opening remaining ball process (step A13) for setting information necessary for the execution is performed.
In step A7, if the special figure game process number is “6”, a big hit end process (step A14) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure routine process is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “7”, in order to perform the process of setting the opening time / opening pattern of the big prize opening, the setting of the fanfare command, and the small hitting process when the small hit occurs A small hitting fanfare process (step A15) for setting necessary information and the like is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “8”, a small hitting process (step A16) for setting an ending command and setting information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball process is performed. .
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “9”, a process for setting a time for discharging the remaining balls won in the big winning opening during the small hitting process, The small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) for setting information necessary for performing the above is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “10”, a small hit end process (step A18) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure routine process is performed.

  Then, after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 (step A19), the symbol fluctuation | variation control process (step A20) which concerns on the special figure 1 indicator 51 is performed. And after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (step A21), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A22) which concerns on the special figure 2 indicator 52 is performed, and a special figure game process is complete | finished. To do. On the other hand, if the value of the special figure game process timer is not “0” in step A4 (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

  Note that the small hit is a result mode that does not involve the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result that involves the operation of the condition device. The condition device is activated when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 38 is set (actual accessory continuous operation device is operated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the aforementioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small lottery. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag that is turned on / off in software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on / off. In addition, the “condition device” is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term having a meaning.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 22, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, a first start port (start winning port 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed. It is determined whether or not there is a winning at one start opening (step A103).
If it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning at the first start opening (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a winning at the first start opening (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure is running shortly (under normal power support) (step A104). ).

If it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is not short (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is short (step A104; Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and an effect command setting process (step A106) is performed. . That is, if the time is short, the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105) and the effect command setting process (step A106) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game. In the case of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the first starting port (start winning port 36) is not left unless it is left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 is not winning unless it is right-handed. Therefore, in the short-time state, a right-handed game is more advantageous than left-handed, but when there is a winning at the first starting port during the short-time state (that is, when left-handed during the short-time state). Is configured such that a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and a notification (warning) for instructing to right-hand is performed by the effect control device 300.
Next, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the first start opening (start winning prize opening 36) (step A107), special figure start opening switch common processing (step A108) is performed.

Next, a winning start monitoring table is prepared for the second starting opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) (step A109), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed to determine whether or not there is a winning at the second starting opening. Determine (step A111).
If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning at the second start opening (step A111; N), the start opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a winning at the second starting port (step A111; Y), the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37) is operating, that is, normal variation. If the winning device 37 is activated to determine whether or not the game ball is open (step A112), and if it is determined that the ordinary electric accessory is operating (step A112; Y), the step The process proceeds to A114, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A112 that the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not a normal electric power fraud has occurred (step A113).

  In determining whether the electric power fraud is occurring, it is determined that the fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraud determination (for example, 5). The normal variation winning device 37 cannot win a game ball in the closed state, and can win a game ball only in the open state. Therefore, when the game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud has occurred. When there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal wins. Then, when the number of illegal winnings counted in this way is equal to or larger than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

  If it is determined in step A113 that there is no unauthorized power transmission (step A113; N), after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the second start opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) (step A114), The start port switch common process (step A115) is performed, and the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. If it is determined in step A113 that the power transmission fraud has occurred (step A113; Y), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is not generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, details of the hard random number acquisition processing (steps A102 and A110) in the above-described start port switch monitoring processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 23, in the hard random number acquisition process, first of all, no winning information of the start target to be monitored among the first start port (start winning port 36) and the second start port (ordinary variable winning device 37) is obtained. It is set (step A121), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the monitored start port switch among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (step A122). Then, when there is no input to the monitoring target start port switch (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is an input to the monitored start port switch (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124). .

  If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the big hit random number extracted to the monitored hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step A125). Then, among the first start port (start winning port 36) and the second start port (ordinary variation winning device 37), information on winning with the start port to be monitored is set (step A126), and hard random number acquisition processing is performed. finish.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special-purpose start port switch common process (steps A108 and A115) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process will be described. The special figure start port switch common process is a process performed in common for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

  As shown in FIG. 24, in the special drawing start port switch common process, first, information on the number of winnings to the monitored start port switch among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is obtained from the gaming machine 10. The start port signal output count that is the output count to the external management device is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step A132), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step A133). ). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the starter signal output number area of the RWM (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135. In the present embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start port signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the updated value becomes “0” by +1 update, and it is determined that the output count overflows.

  Next, it is determined whether the number of special figure reservation (starting memory) to be updated corresponding to the monitoring target starter switch among the starter 1 switch 36a and the starter 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit (step A135). When the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A135; N), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated. If the number of special figure hold to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), update the number of special figure hold to be updated (number of special figure 1 hold or special figure 2 hold) by +1 ( Step A136), the target start opening winning flag is saved (Step A137). Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored and the special figure hold number is calculated (step A138), and the big hit random number prepared in step A125 is saved in the big hit random number storage area of the RWM ( Step A139). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starter switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

Next, it is determined whether or not the first start opening (start winning opening 36) is won (step A142).
If it is determined in step A142 that the winning is not for the first start opening (step A142; N), the process proceeds to step A145.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A142 that the winning is to the first start opening (step A142; Y), a small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step A143), and the RWM small hit symbol is selected. Save in the random number storage area (step A144).

Next, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding RWM fluctuation pattern random number storage area (step A145), and special figure hold information determination processing (step A146) is performed.
Next, a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the monitoring target start opening switch and the special figure hold number is prepared (step A147), a production command setting process (step A148) is performed, and a special figure start opening switch common process is performed. finish.

  Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls to the start winning area of the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, and becomes the right to execute the variable display game. A starting storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as starting storage is provided. Further, the game control device 100 stores various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning port (start winning port 36) as a first start memory with a predetermined number as an upper limit. A second start memory that serves as a storage means and stores various random number values extracted based on the winning of a game ball in the second start winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) as a second start memory up to a predetermined number. Make a means.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (step A146) in the above-described start port switch common process will be described. The special figure hold information determination process is a prefetching process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 25, first, the starting opening prize flag saved in step A137 is checked to determine whether the winning is for the first starting opening (start winning opening 36) (step A151).
If it is determined in step A151 that the winning is not for the first start opening (step A151; N), the process proceeds to step A154.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A151 that the winning is to the first start opening (step A151; Y), it is determined whether or not the special drawing time is short (step A152).

If it is determined in step A152 that the special figure time is short (step A152; Y), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A152 that the special drawing time is not short (step A152; N), it is determined whether the big hit or the small hit is being made (step A153).
In step A153, when it is determined that the big hit or the small hit is being made (step A153; Y), the special figure holding information determination processing is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A153 that no big hit or small hit is being made (step A153; N), it is determined whether or not the big hit is a big hit depending on whether or not the big hit random value matches the big hit determination value. Prefetch big hit determination processing (step A154) is performed.

  As will be described later, in the prefetch jackpot determination process, a determination result that can identify the result and the probability state that brings about the result is generated. This determination result is one of three types: a big hit in either a low probability state (normal probability state) or a high probability state, a big hit in either a low probability state or a high probability state, and a big hit only in a high probability state.

  If the determination result is a big hit (step A155; Y), that is, if the determination result is a big hit or only in a high probability state in either the low probability state or the high probability state, the target start-up switch and the determination result The big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to is set (step A156), the stop symbol information corresponding to the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A140 is acquired (step A157), and the process proceeds to step A164.

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step A155; N), that is, if the determination result is not in either the low probability state or the high probability state, the first start opening (start winning opening 36) is won. Is determined (step A158).
If it is determined in step A158 that the winning is not to the first start opening (step A158; N), the stop symbol information of the deviation is set (step A163), and the process proceeds to step A164.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A158 that the first start opening is won (step A158; Y), whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value or not is a small hit. A small hit determination process (step A159) for determining whether or not. If the determination result is not a small hit (step A160; N), the stop symbol information of the detachment is set (step A163), and the process proceeds to step A164.
On the other hand, if the determination result is a small hit (step A160; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step A161), and stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A143 is obtained. (Step A162), and the process proceeds to step A164.
The jackpot determination value used in the low probability state is included in the jackpot determination value used in the high probability state, and the small hit determination value is not included in the jackpot determination value used in the high probability state. Therefore, when the determination result is either a big hit or a big hit only in the high probability state, the big hit is not a small hit.

  Then, a pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the target start opening switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A164), and an effect command setting process is performed (step A165). Next, a special figure information setting process (step A166) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern is performed, and a fluctuation pattern setting process for setting the fluctuation mode of the special figure fluctuation display game is performed (step S166). A167).

  After that, a pre-reading variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number representing the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A168), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step A169), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. The special figure information setting process in step A166 and the fluctuation pattern setting process in step A167 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure ordinary process.

The information set by the above processing is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as prior determination result information, and the effect control device 300 performs a prefetch effect based on this information.
That is, the game control device 100 serves as control information transmitting means for transmitting control information in the main control means (game control device 100) to the effect control means (effect control device 300).

[Look-ahead jackpot judgment processing]
FIG. 26 shows details of the prefetch jackpot determination process (step A154) in the special figure hold information determination process described above. In this look-ahead jackpot determination process, first, a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step A171), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A172).

  The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value that is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value It is determined that it is a big hit. The range of the jackpot determination value used in the low probability state and the range of the jackpot determination value used in the high probability state have the same lower limit determination value. The low-probability judgment value and the high-probability judgment value used in this look-ahead jackpot judgment process are the low-probability judgment value and the high-probability judgment value in the big-bonus judgment process executed at the start of the special figure variation display game. It is the same judgment value as the value.

  When the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A172; Y), the judgment result is set as a deviation (displacement in either the low probability state or the high probability state) (step A177), and the big hit judgment process is terminated. To do. If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A172; N), an upper limit determination value with a low probability is set (step A173), and the upper limit determination value with the target big hit random value being a low probability. It is determined whether it is larger (step A174).

If the value of the target jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value during the low probability (step A174; N), the judgment result is set to the big / low probability big hit (both in the low probability state and the high probability state). (Step A178), and the look-ahead jackpot determination process ends.
Further, when the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value during the low probability (step A174; Y), the upper limit determination value during the high probability is set (step A175), and the value of the target big hit random number is high. It is determined whether it is larger than the upper limit determination value in the probability (step A176).

When the value of the target big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value in the high probability (step A176; N), the big hit (hit only in the high probability state) is set as the determination result only at the high probability (step A179). Then, the look-ahead jackpot determination process ends.
If the target big hit random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value during the high probability (step A176; Y), the determination result is set to a deviation (either a low probability state or a high probability state) (step A177). ), The jackpot determination process is terminated.

  Through the above processing, a prefetch symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory to be prefetched and a prefetch variation pattern command including information on the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. And transmitted to the production control device 300. As a result, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information corresponding to the start memory (whether it is a big hit or the type of the fluctuation pattern) is controlled before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory. The device 300 can be notified, and in particular, by changing the decoration special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, the result related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variable display game. It is possible to notify.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as start memory in the start memory means (game control device 100) before the execution of the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). Etc.) Pre-determination means. Note that the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of start winning when the start memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Big prize opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 27, in the special prize opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game process number is “4”, that is, whether the special prize opening process is in progress (step A201). . When the special winning opening is being opened (step A201; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. If the special winning opening is not being opened (step A201; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game process number is “5”, that is, whether the special winning opening remaining ball is being processed (step S201). A202).
If the winning prize remaining ball processing is in progress (step A202; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. If the winning ball remaining ball processing is not being performed (step A205; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is “8”, that is, whether the small hitting middle processing is being performed (step A203). ).
When the small hitting process is being performed (step A204; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. If the small hitting process is not in progress (step A203; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game process number is “9”, that is, whether the small hit remaining ball process is in progress (step A204).
Since the special figure game process number does not shift to the next until the special figure game process timer becomes “0”, the progress of the game can be checked by the special figure game process number.

When the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A204; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring processing is terminated. If the small hit remaining sphere processing is in progress (step A204; Y), the processing proceeds to step A205.
Then, “0” is set to the winning counter (step A205), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the big winning opening switch 1 (one big winning opening switch 38a) (step A206).

  If there is no input to the big prize opening switch 1 (step A206; N), it is determined whether there is an input to the big prize opening switch 2 (the other big prize opening switch 38a) (step A210). If there is an input to the special winning opening switch 1 (step A206; Y), a special winning opening count command is prepared (step A207) and an effect command setting process (step A208) is performed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A209), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the big prize opening switch 2 (the other big prize opening switch 38a) (step A210).

  If there is no input to the big winning opening switch 2 (step A210; N), it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A214). When there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (step A210; Y), a special winning opening count command is prepared (step A211), and an effect command setting process (step A212) is performed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A213), and it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A214).

In the determination of whether the value of the winning counter is “0” (step A268), when the value of the winning counter is “0” (step A214; Y), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter is not “0” (step A214; N), it is determined whether or not the big winning opening remaining ball processing is being performed (step A215).
If the winning ball remaining ball processing is in progress (step A215; Y), the winning winning port switch monitoring process is terminated. If the winning ball remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A215; N), the small hit remaining ball processing It is determined whether it is in the middle (step A216).
When the small hit remaining ball processing is being performed (step A216; Y), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated, and when the small hit remaining ball processing is not being performed (step A216; N), the value of the winning counter (1 or 2) is added to the number of winning prizes (step A217), and it is determined whether or not the number of winning prizes exceeds an upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round, for example, “9”) (step). A218).

  When the number of the big prize winning count is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A218; N), the special winning prize mouth switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the number of the big winning mouth count becomes equal to or larger than the upper limit (step A218; Y), the special winning mouth count number is kept at the upper limit (step A219), and the special game processing timer area is cleared to 0 ( Step A220), it is determined whether the small hitting is being processed (Step A221). When it is not under mid-hit processing (step A221; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated, and when under middle hit processing (step A221; Y), the big win mouth control pointer area is small hit. The value of the end of the opening operation is saved (step A222), and the big prize opening switch monitoring process is ended. This closes the grand prize opening and ends one round.

[Special figure routine processing]
Next, the details of the special figure routine process (step A8) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 28, in the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start memory number) is “0” (step A301). If it is determined that the special figure 2 hold number is “0” (step A301; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 hold number (first start memory number) is “0” (step A306). If it is determined that the special figure 1 hold number is “0” (step A 306; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step A 311). A311; N) sets a customer waiting demo flag in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A312).

  Subsequently, a customer waiting demonstration command is prepared (step A313), an effect command setting process (step A314) is performed, a special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A315) is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated. . On the other hand, when the customer waiting demonstration has been started in step A311, (step A311; Y), the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A315) is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated.

In step A301, if the special figure 2 hold number is not “0” (step A301; N), a special figure 2 change start process (step A302) is performed, and the decorative special figure corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is executed. A reservation number command is prepared (step A303), and an effect command setting process (step A304) is performed. Then, the special figure changing process transition setting process (step A305) of special figure 2 is performed, and the special figure usual process is terminated.
In step A306, when the special figure 1 hold number is not “0” (step A306; N), a special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A307) is performed, and the decorative special figure corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is executed. A reserve number command is prepared (step A308), and an effect command setting process (step A309) is performed. Then, the special figure changing process transition setting process (step A310) of special figure 1 is performed, and the special figure usual process is terminated.

  As described above, the special figure 2 hold count is checked before the special figure 1 hold count check. If the special figure 2 hold count is not “0”, the special figure 2 change start process (step A302). Will be executed. That is, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start memory means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the second start memory is displayed as the variable display based on the first start memory. Priority control means for executing with priority over the game.

[Special figure transition setting process 1]
Next, details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A315) in the above-described special figure normal process and the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A741) in the special figure display process described later will be described. As shown in FIG. 29, in the special figure normal process transition setting process 1, first, “0” related to the special figure normal process is set as the process number (step A321), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area. (Step A322), and the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (Step A323). Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A324), and the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 variation start process (step A307) in the above-described special figure ordinary process will be described. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. As shown in FIG. 30, first, a special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A331), and the first special figure fluctuation is performed. A jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A332) is performed to set the shift information and the jackpot information to the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the display game is a jackpot.

  Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A333) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which sets the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern An information setting process (step A334) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step A335). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A336) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information of the first special figure variation display game. (Step A337) is performed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Start Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A302) in the above-described special figure ordinary process will be described. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. Is what you do.

  As shown in FIG. 31, first, a special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A341), and the second special figure fluctuation is performed. A jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) is performed for setting the shift information and jackpot information to the jackpot flag 2 for determining whether or not the display game is a jackpot.

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) relating to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special symbol for setting the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern An information setting process (step A344) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step A345). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the second special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information of the second special figure variation display game. (Step A347) is performed, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 32 shows the big hit flag 1 setting process (step A332) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In the big hit flag 1 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the small hit flag area (step A351), and deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step A352). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1), prepared (step A353), and the special figure big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (Step A354). Note that for the number of holdings 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process (step A355) is performed for determining whether the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value or not.

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A355) is a big hit (step A356; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step A352 (step A357). ), The big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A355) is not a big hit (step A356; N), whether the prepared big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value or not is a big hit. A small hit determination process (step A358) is performed to determine.

  If the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A358) is a small hit (step A359; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag area in which the loss information is saved in step A351. (Step A360), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A358) is not a small hit (step A359; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is performed while saving the deviation information in both the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. finish. Thus, in the present embodiment, the result of the first special figure variation display game is any one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “out of game”.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 33 shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the above-described special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In the big hit flag 2 setting process, first, shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step A371). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for hold number 1), prepared (step A372), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for hold number 1) is cleared to 0 (Step A372). Note that for the number of reservations 1 is an area for storing information (random number or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process (step A374) is performed for determining whether the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value or not.

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A374) is a big hit (step A375; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A371 (step A375). ), The big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A374) is not a big hit (step A375; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the second special figure fluctuation display game is either “big hit” or “out of game”.

[Big hit judgment processing]
FIG. 34 shows the big hit determination process (steps A355 and A374) in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process described above. In the jackpot determination process, first, a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step A381), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value that is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value It is determined that it is a big hit.

When the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), the difference is set as the determination result (step A387), and the big hit determination process ends. Specifically, when the jackpot determination process is a jackpot determination process (step A355) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process, if the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), Since it is a small hit or miss, “other than big hit (small hit or miss)” is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, when the jackpot determination process is the jackpot determination process (step A374) in the jackpot flag 2 setting process, the case where the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y) is out of place. Therefore, “other than big hit (out)” is set as the determination result (step A387).
On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; N), it is determined whether or not the state is a high probability state (step A383).

  If it is in a high probability state (step A383; Y), an upper limit determination value with a high probability is set (step A384), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386). ). If not in the high probability state (step A383; N), an upper limit determination value with a low probability is set (step A385), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386). .

When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), the difference is set as the determination result (step A357), and the big hit determination process is terminated. Specifically, when the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A355) in the big hit flag 1 setting process, when the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), Since it is a hit or miss, “other than big hit (small hit or miss)” is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, when the jackpot determination process is the jackpot determination process (step A374) in the jackpot flag 2 setting process, the case where the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y) is out of sync. Then, “other than big hit (out)” is set as the determination result (step A387).
If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; N), that is, if the big hit is a big hit, the big hit is set as the determination result (step A388), and the big hit determination process is terminated.
That is, the game control device 100 uses the predetermined random numbers stored in the first start storage means and the second start storage means based on the determination value corresponding to the probability state at the time of execution of the variable display game based on the start storage. It serves as a runtime determination means that can be determined.
The execution time determination means may not be determined at the start of the special figure variation display game. For example, the result of the special figure variation display game corresponding to the probability state at the start of the special figure variation display game may be selected from the prefetch result and the probability state information that brings about the result.

[Small hit judgment processing]
FIG. 35 shows the small hit determination process (steps A159 and A358) in the special figure hold information determination process and the big hit flag 1 setting process described above. In this small hit determination process, first, a small hit lower limit determination value is set, and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A391). Note that the small hit determination is performed using the same random number (big hit random number) as the big hit determination. In other words, “small hit” means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the small hit lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the upper limit of the small hit judgment value is the upper limit value. When it is less than or equal to the determination value, it is determined to be a small hit. Of course, the range of the big hit judgment value and the range of the small hit judgment value are set so as not to suffer.

If the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A391; Y), that is, if it is out of place, a determination is made as a determination result (step A393), and the small hit determination processing is terminated.
If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A391; N), a small hit upper limit determination value is set, and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value. (Step A392).

If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A392; Y), that is, if it is out of place, a determination is made as a determination result (step A393), and the small hit determination process ends.
If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A392; N), that is, if it is a small hit, the small hit is set as the determination result (step A394), and the small hit determination processing is terminated. To do.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 36 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A333) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A401). The jackpot symbol random number is loaded from (for step A402). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step A403), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A404). By this process, the type of special result is selected.

  After that, the special symbol 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A405), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A406). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on a special symbol display (here, special symbol 1 indicator 51) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A407), the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the time reduction determination is acquired. The data area is saved (step A408), and the production mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A409). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state and the effect mode after the special game state ends. In the case of the present embodiment, the effect mode shifts in response to the hit, and the transition destination of the effect mode that shifts after the hit ends changes according to the type of winning symbol (type of big hit symbol or small hit). In addition, in the case of a special big hit symbol (for example, 4R probability variation symbol) in the special bonus figure 1, the transition-destination effect mode is a certain probability variation confirmation depending on whether or not the gaming state is in the probability variation. It is determined whether to shift to the production mode, which is difficult to distinguish whether it is the production mode or the probability variation. Then, a special decoration figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A401; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag is a small hit (step A410), and if it is a small hit (step A411; Y), the special figure 1 small hit is determined. The small hit design random number is loaded from the design random number storage area (for the number of holdings 1) (step A411). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (step A412), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A413).
Thereafter, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A414), and effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A415). Then, a special decoration figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

  If the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A410; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number region (step A416), and the loss stop symbol pattern is stored in the stop symbol pattern region. Save (step A417), and prepare a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A418). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step A419), and an effect command setting process (step A420) is performed. This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A421), and the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A422). The small hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A423), and the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 37 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A431). ) Is loaded with the jackpot symbol random number (step A432). Next, a special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (step A433), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A434). By this process, the type of special result is selected.

  Thereafter, the special symbol 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A435), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A436). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on a special symbol display (here, special symbol 2 indicator 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A437), the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the time reduction determination is acquired. The data area is saved (step A438), and the presentation mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A439). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state and the effect mode after the special game state ends. Further, in the case of this embodiment, in the big hit in the special figure 2, regardless of the big hit symbol, the destination production mode becomes a dedicated production mode in which the probability change is confirmed. Then, a special decoration figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A442).

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag 2 is not big hit (step A431; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (step A440), and the loss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. (Step A441), a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (Step A442). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step A443), and an effect command setting process (step A444) is performed. This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A445), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A446). 2. The stop symbol setting process is terminated.

  In other words, the game control device 100 executes the first variation display game as the variation display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first start prize opening (start prize winning hole 36), and the second start prize opening (ordinary variable prize winning). Based on the detection of the game ball by the device 37), a variation display game executing means for executing the second variation display game as the variation display game is provided. In addition, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution control unit that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination unit (game control device 100).

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, details of the special figure information setting process (steps A166, A334, and A344) in the special figure hold information determination process, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described. In the case of the present embodiment, the probability state (low / high probability, with / without time) does not affect the change distribution, and the effect mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the change distribution. In the effect mode, one effect mode is set from a plurality of effect modes in accordance with the probability state, the presence / absence of the short time state, the progress of the special figure variation display game, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 38, in the special figure information setting process, first, the first half variation group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and the first half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A452).
Next, the first-half variable group selection offset table is set (step A453), and offset data corresponding to the target special figure hold count and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A454).
Next, the first-half variation group selection pointer and offset data are added (step A455), and the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variation distribution information 1 area (step A456). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 generated based on the stop symbol type, the number of holds, and the effect mode is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area. The fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (fluctuation mode until the start of reach), and is used to select a fluctuation group later. However, depending on the specifications of the model, since the fluctuation time is shortened only when there is a large number when the number of holdings is large, the number of holdings does not affect the distribution of the first half fluctuation as a result. A variation group includes a plurality of variation patterns. When determining a variation pattern, the variation group is first selected, and then one variation pattern is selected from the variation group. ing.

Next, the latter half variation group selection pointer table is set (step A457), and the latter half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A458).
Next, the second half variation group selection offset table is set (step A459), and offset data corresponding to the target special figure holding number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A460).
Next, the latter half variation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A461), the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variation distribution information 2 area (step A462), and the special figure information setting process is terminated. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of holds, and the effect mode is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. This fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (reach type (including no reach)), and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, the reach rate changes according to the number of holds only in the case of a loss (the reach rate becomes low when the number of holds is large). Does not affect.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the above-described special figure hold information determination process, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and the fluctuation pattern setting process (steps A167, A336, A346) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start will be described. Note that the fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation that is a fluctuation aspect from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. First, the second half variation pattern is set first, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

  As shown in FIG. 39, in the variation pattern setting process, first, a variation group selection address table is set (step A471), and the address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step A472), the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the target fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A473). In the present embodiment, the structure of the latter-half variation group table differs depending on whether it is a hit or not. Specifically, the hit use has a 1-byte size and the out-use use has a 2-byte size. The hit occurrence rate is lower than the occurrence rate of loss, and even 1 byte is sufficient. Therefore, from the viewpoint of saving the data capacity, the use is 1 byte size. Therefore, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used for the hit. In addition, the occurrence rate of deviation is higher than the occurrence rate of hits, and in order to make more various effects appear, the size for removal is a 2-byte size.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure variation display game is out of step (step A474). Transition to processing. On the other hand, if it is not out of step (step A474; N), a sorting process (step A476) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A477.

  Then, the address of the latter half fluctuation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (step A477), and the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target fluctuation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of holdings 1), Prepare (Step A478). Then, a sorting process (step A479) is performed, the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (step A480). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

  Next, the first half variation group table is set (step A481), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the variation distribution information 1 and the second half variation number (step A482). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step A483), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of holdings 1). (Step A484). Thereafter, a sorting process (step A485) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired, saved in the first half variation number area (step A486), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern that is an execution mode of the game from among a plurality of variations.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, details of the change start information setting process (steps A337 and A347) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process and special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. As shown in FIG. 40, in the change start information setting process, first, the random number storage areas of the target change pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are cleared (step A491). Next, the first half variation time value table is set (step A492), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is acquired (step A493). Further, the latter half variation time value table is set (step A494), and the latter half variation time value corresponding to the latter half variation number is acquired (step A495).

  Then, the first half variation time value and the second half variation time value are added (step A496), and the added value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A497). Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first variation number is prepared (step A498), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second variation number is prepared (step A499), and an effect command setting process is performed (step A500). ). Next, the special symbol hold number corresponding to the variation symbol discrimination flag is updated by -1 (step A501), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variation symbol discrimination flag is set (step A502). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step A503), the empty area after the shift is cleared (step A504), and the variation start information setting process is terminated.

  Through the above processing, information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that determines various random values stored in the start storage unit (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  Information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. To set the detailed contents of the decoration special map change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information related to the start memory number (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information related to the stop symbol, and a fluctuation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information related to the pattern and a stop information command including information related to extension of the stop time are listed, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the variation command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Special figure changing process transition setting process (Special figure 1)]
FIG. 41 shows the special-fluctuation changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) (step A310) in the special-figure normal process. In the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1), first, “1” is set as the process number (step A511), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A512).

  Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A513), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 fluctuation signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A514). Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A515), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (the blinking cycle timer of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blink control timer area. For example, 100 ms is set (step A516), and the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) is terminated.

[Special figure changing process transition setting process (Special figure 2)]
FIG. 42 shows the special-fluctuation changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) (step A305) in the special-figure normal process. In this special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2), first, “1” is set as the process number (step A521), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A522).

  Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A523), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation in the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 fluctuation signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A524). Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A525), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking period of the special figure 2 display 52) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area. For example, 100 ms) is set (step A526), and the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) is terminated.

[Special figure changing process]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 43, in the special figure changing process, first, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A601), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A602). ). In the case of the present embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is an outlier symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 ms, and when the stop symbol pattern is a jackpot symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 ms. When the pattern is a small hit symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time.
Subsequently, the special figure display process transition setting process (step A603) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated. That is, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

[Special map display process transition setting process]
FIG. 44 shows the special figure display mid-process transition setting process (step A603) in the special figure changing process described above. In this special figure display process transition setting process, first, the process number “2” related to the special figure display process is set (step A611), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A612).

  Next, a signal related to the end of change in Special Figure 1 (for example, special signal 1 changing signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (Step A613), and a signal related to the end of change in Special Figure 2 (for example, special design) (2 in-flight signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A614), and the control timer is initially set in the symbol determination number signal control timer area related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variable display game for output to the external information terminal. A value (for example, 256 milliseconds) is saved (step A615). Thereafter, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 1 display 51, a stop flag related to the variable stop on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A616). ) As the information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step). A617), the special figure changing process transition setting process is terminated.

[Special figure display processing]
Next, the details of the special figure display process (step A10) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, in the special figure display process, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A701), and the RWM Processing for clearing the small hit flag area (step A702) is performed.
Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process and the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 set process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process are loaded. (Step A703), a process of clearing the RWM big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area (step A704) is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A705). (For example, the condition device operating signal ON, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal ON, and the special symbol 2 signal ON) are saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A708), A round number upper limit value table is set (step A709).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A705 that the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A705; N) as a result of checking the big hit flag 2, it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A706), and the big hit (step A705). If A706; Y) is determined, a test signal related to the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the first special figure variation display game (for example, the condition device operating signal ON, the accessory continuous operating device active signal ON, The special symbol 1 signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A707), and processing for setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709) is performed.

  After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step A709), the round number upper limit value (in the present embodiment, “16” or “4”) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired, and the RWM Are saved in the upper limit area of the number of rounds (step A710). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

  Next, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decoration special figure command area of the RWM, prepared (step A712), and an effect command setting process (step A713) is performed. Thereafter, a probability information command related to information for setting the probability of the hit result in the normal map variation display game and the special map variation display game to be a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A714), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A716), and an effect command setting process (step A717) is performed.

  Next, the prize winning opening release information and the signal corresponding to the probability state of the winning result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of the present embodiment, in step A718, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the probability state. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening information and the probability state. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is ON when the jackpot is a jackpot with a ball (the jackpot opening information is other than the jackpot opening information 1), and the jackpot without a ball (the so-called sudden hit jackpot. When the information is the big prize opening information 1), it is ON if it is a big hit in the short time state, and is OFF otherwise. The big hit 3 signal is ON when the big hit has a ball and is OFF when the big hit has no ball.

  After that, the winning prize opening information and the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 msec, 4700 msec, 7700 msec, or 300 msec) corresponding to the state of the probability of being a hit result in the ordinary map variation display game and the special map variation display game. It is set (step A719), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A720). Then, the special game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special game mode flag save area (step A721). As a result, information on the probability state and the short time state of the special figure when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state is determined based on the information stored later.

  Then, the large winning mouth illegal prize number area of the big winning mouth (special variable winning device 38) corresponding to the big winning opening information is cleared (Step A722), and the big winning opening corresponding to the big winning opening information is cleared. The fraud monitoring period outside flag is saved in the mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (step A723). Thereafter, fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step A724) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not big hit in step A706 (step A706; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step A725).
If it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is a small hit (step A725; Y), the high probability variation frequency update process (step A726), the production mode information check process related to the production mode setting (step A727). ) To determine whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step A728).

When it is determined in step A728 that the special figure is not in high probability (step A728; N), the special decoration command is loaded from the special decoration command area, prepared (step A729), and the production command is set. Processing (step A730) is performed. Next, a small hitting fanfare command is prepared (step A731), an effect command setting process (step A732) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A733.
If it is determined in step A728 that the special figure has a high probability (step A728; Y), the process proceeds to step A733. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state, the big winning opening is opened by occurrence of a small hit, but the occurrence of the small hit is a game. The screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed in order to prevent the person from being aware of it.
Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A733). Thereafter, the small hitting fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1 (step A734) is performed, and the special figure display mid-process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A725; N), the high probability variation frequency update process (step A735), the production mode information check process related to the production mode setting (step A735). A736) is performed, a remaining switching preparation rotation speed corresponding to the effect mode number is set (step A737), and it is determined whether or not the remaining effect rotation speed matches the remaining switching preparation rotation speed (step A738). The remaining number of rotations for preparation for switching may be a different value (number of rotations) in all the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes, or the same value in any effect mode of the plurality of effect modes. (Number of rotations) may be used, or the same value (number of rotations) may be used in all the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes.
If it is determined in step A738 that the remaining rotation speed for production and the remaining rotation speed for switching preparation do not match (step A738; N), special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A741) is performed to display the special figure. End the middle process.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A738 that the remaining production rotation speed matches the remaining switching preparation rotation speed (step A738; Y), a production mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A739), and production command setting is performed. After performing the process (step A740), the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A741) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated. The production mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing the pre-reading production from being performed several rotations before the production mode is switched. It is possible to prevent contradiction from occurring.

[High probability change count update processing]
Next, the details of the high-probability fluctuation number update process (steps A726 and A735) in the above-described special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 47, in the high probability variation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure has a high probability (during a high probability state) (step A751). If the special figure is not in high probability (step A751; N), the high probability variation frequency update process is terminated. If the special figure has a high probability (step A751; Y), the high probability change count is updated by -1 (step A752), and it is determined whether the high probability change count is "0" (step A753). ).

If the high probability variation number is not “0” (step A753; N), the high probability variation number update process is terminated. When the number of high-probability fluctuations is “0” (step A753; Y), the high-probability notification flag area is cleared (step A754), and a signal related to high-probability end (for example, two jackpot signals are turned off) ) Is saved in the external information output data area.
Next, signals related to the end of the high probability state and the short time state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal is OFF, and the special symbol 2 variation is Save the time shortening state signal OFF and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal OFF) in the test signal output data area. In addition, there is a state of “high probability & short time” and a state of “high probability & short time”, and even in the special figure high probability, only the probability state changes, so the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal and The normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is always OFF.

Next, the number without time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step A757), the ordinary low probability flag is saved in the ordinary game mode flag area (step A758), and the special figure game mode flag area is designated. The low probability & short time flag is saved (step A759).
Next, a signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A760), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first game state display unit 57) is displayed. In order to turn it off, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A761), and the high probability variation number update process is terminated.

[Direction mode information check processing]
Next, the details of the effect mode information check process (steps A727 and A736) in the above special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 48, in the effect mode information check process, first, it is determined whether or not the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A771). If the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A771; Y), the effect mode information check process is terminated. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of executed special figure variation display games, and for example, the effect mode that continues until the next big hit in the high probability state is selected. .

  If the next mode transition information is not a no-update code (step A771; N), the effect remaining number of revolutions, which is the number of executions of the special figure variable display game until the change of the effect mode, is updated by -1 (step A772). Then, it is determined whether or not the remaining rotational speed of the effect has become “0” (step A773). If the effect remaining rotational speed is not “0” (step A773; N), the effect mode information check process is terminated. In addition, when the remaining rotation number of the effect becomes “0” (step A773; Y), that is, when the effect mode is changed from the next special figure variation display game, an effect mode information address table is set (step A774). Then, the address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information is acquired (step A775).

  Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, saved in the effect mode number area in the RWM (step A776), the remaining effect rotation speed of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, and the remaining effect rotation speed in the RWM is acquired. Save to the area (step A677), acquire the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transferred, and save in the next mode transition information area in the RWM (step A678). Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the newly set effect mode number is prepared (step A779), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A780). When the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A780; Y), that is, when the state of the probability has not changed, the effect mode information check process is terminated.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A780; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A782). An effect command setting process (step A782) is performed.
Next, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the newly set effect remaining speed is prepared (step A783), and an effect command setting process (step A784) is performed.
Next, a high probability variation number command corresponding to the high probability variation number is prepared (step A785), and an effect command setting process (step A786) is performed.
Next, it is determined whether the new effect mode is a left-handed mode (step A787). If the new effect mode is not a left-handed mode (step A787; N), the effect mode information check process is terminated. If it is the left-handed mode (step A787; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A788), an effect command setting process (step A789) is performed, and the effect mode information check process is terminated. To do. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of notifying the switching before the specified rotational speed for switching the effect mode. Since the game control device 100 manages the production mode in this way, for example, control such as generation of a specific reach only in a specific production mode can be performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step A724) in the above special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 49, in the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1, first, “3”, which is the process number related to the fanfare / interval process, is set (step A791) and processed in the special figure game process number area. The number is saved (step A792).

  Next, a signal related to the start of the big hit (special gaming state) (for example, one big hit signal is ON (output with big hit + small hit), and four big hits are ON (output with big hit)) is saved in the external information output data area. (Step A793), a signal related to the end of the high probability state and the short time state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 variable time shortening state signal is OFF, special The symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal is OFF and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A794). In addition, even during the special figure high probability, since only the probability state changes, the normal symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always OFF. Thereafter, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special gaming state is cleared (step A795), the number without time is saved in the gaming state display number area (step A796), and the normal game mode flag Save the ordinary low probability flag in the area (step A797).

  Then, the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A798), and the high probability notification flag area is cleared in order to turn off the gaming state display LED (third gaming state display unit 59) related to the display of the high probability state ( In step A799), the special figure low probability & no short time flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A800). Next, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the production control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A801), and the special figure change that can be executed in the high probability state The high probability variation frequency area for managing the number of times of the display game is cleared (step A802). As a result, the high-probability state and the short-time state are terminated, and the normal probability state and the normal state are obtained.

  Thereafter, the number of effect mode 1 is saved in the effect mode number area (step A803), the effect remaining rotation speed area is cleared (step A804), and the no-update code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A805). . Then, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A806), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first game state display unit 57) is displayed. In order to make it light up, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A807), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 ends. As a result, the information on the effect mode is once cleared with the occurrence of the special game state.

[Small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1]
Next, details of the small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1 (step A734) in the above-described special figure display mid-process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 50, in the small hitting fanfare process transition setting process 1, first, “7” relating to the small hitting fanfare process is set as a process number (step A811), and the process number is designated as the special game process. Save in the number area (step A812).

  Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A813), and a signal related to the start of the small hit game (for example, one big hit signal is turned ON (large hit + small hit is output) )) Is saved in the external information output data area (step A814), and a signal related to the start of the small hit game (for example, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A815).

Next, the winning prize mouth illegal winning number area is cleared (step A816), and an illegal monitoring period non-period flag is saved in the big winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step A817).
Next, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (the firing position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A818), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first gaming state display unit 57) is turned on. Therefore, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A819), and the small hitting fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Fanfare / In-interval processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval process (step A11) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 51, in the fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step A901), and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step A902). Then, an effect command setting process (step A903) is performed.

After that, a special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A904), an opening switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening information is acquired (step A905), and the number of rounds in the special gaming state is acquired. It is determined whether it is larger than the value (step A906).
When the number of rounds is larger than the opening switching determination value (step A906; Y), the large winning opening opening time for short opening (for example, 0.2 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A907). A process for setting a transition to a process for opening a special prize opening (step A909) is performed, and the process during the fanfare / interval is terminated.
If the number of rounds is not larger than the open switching determination value (step A906; N), the long open big opening opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A908). Then, a process transition setting process (step A909) during the special winning opening is performed, and the fanfare / interval process is terminated.

Here, in this embodiment, as a big hit pattern, (1) 4R, special winning opening release information 1 (all short opening), (2) 16R, special winning opening release information 2 (all long opening), (3) 16R, special prize opening information 3 (1-4R is long open, 5-16R is short open), (4) 4R, special prize opening information 4 (all are long open), (5) 16R, special prize opening is open Information 5 (all open long), (6) 16R, large winning opening information 6 (1-8R is long opening, 9-16R is short opening), (7) 16R, large winning opening information 7 (1-4R) Is long open, and 5-16R is short open).
Therefore, in the big prize opening operation determination table, the big prize opening information 1 data and the opening switching determination value “0”, the big winning opening information 2 data and the opening switching determination value “16” are the big winning opening. The opening information 3 data and the opening switching determination value “4” are the big winning opening opening information 4 data and the opening switching determination value “4”, and the big winning opening opening information 5 data and the opening switching determination value “16” are. The special winning opening opening information 6 data and the opening switching determination value “8” are stored in association with the large winning opening opening information 7 data and the opening switching determination value “4” in association with each other. Then, an opening operation is performed so that long opening is performed while the number of rounds is equal to or less than the opening switching determination value, and short opening is performed when the number of rounds exceeds the opening switching determination value.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process]
FIG. 52 shows the process for setting a process for setting a special winning opening during the above-mentioned fanfare / interval process (step A909). In the process for setting the process for opening a special prize opening, first, the process number is set to “4” related to the process for opening a special prize opening (step A911), and the process number is saved in the special game process number area (step A911). Step A912). Thereafter, a signal related to the opening of the special winning opening (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A913), and the number of winnings to the special winning opening is stored. The information in the winning mouth count area is cleared (step A914). Then, the ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A915), and the special winning opening open process transition setting process is terminated.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
Next, the details of the special winning opening opening process (step A12) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 53, in the special winning opening open process, first, the current round number is compared by comparing the current round number in the special game state being executed with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area of the RWM. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A1001). If it is not the final round (step A1001; N), a special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1002), and an open switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening information is acquired (step A1003). It is determined whether the number of rounds in the gaming state is greater than the acquired opening switching determination value (step A1004).
If the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A1004; Y), the remaining ball processing time for short closing (for example, 1.4 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1005). An interval command related to the interval between rounds is prepared (step A1007), an effect command setting process (step A1010) is performed, a big winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process (step A1011) is performed, and the big winning opening is being opened. The process ends.

  If the number of rounds is not larger than the open switching determination value (step A1004; N), the remaining ball processing time for long closing (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step S1004). A1006), an interval command is prepared (step A1007), an effect command setting process (step A1010) is performed, a big prize opening remaining ball process transition setting process (step A1011) is executed, and the big prize opening opening process is completed. To do.

  On the other hand, if it is the final round (step A1001; Y), the final remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1008), and the end of the special gaming state is completed. An ending command relating to display control of the ending display screen at the time of preparation (step A1009), performing an effect command setting process (step A1010), performing a winning prize remaining ball processing transition setting process (step A1011), The process during opening of the big prize opening ends.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 54 shows the special winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process (step A1011) in the above-described special winning opening open process. In the special winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process, first, the processing number is set to “5” related to the winning prize remaining ball process (step A1021), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A1022). Then, in order to close the open / close door 38c of the special variable prize winning device 38, off data for turning off the big prize opening solenoid 38b is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (step A1023), and the big prize opening remaining. The ball processing transition setting process is terminated.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing]
Next, details of the big winning opening remaining ball process (step A13) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 55, in the winning ball remaining ball processing, first, the current round is determined by comparing the current round number in the special game state being executed with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area of the RWM. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A1101).

If the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step A1101; N), a special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1102), and an opening switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening information is acquired. Then, a normal interval time (for example, 0.1 second) is set (step A1104).
Next, it is determined whether the number of rounds in the special game state is larger than the acquired opening switching determination value (step A1105). If the number of rounds is larger than the opening switching determination value (step A1105; Y), step A1109 Move on to processing. If the number of rounds is not larger than the opening switching determination value (step A1105; N), it is determined whether the special winning opening information is a rank-down effect system value (step A1106).

  Here, the rank-down effect corresponds to an effect in which a round continuation notification effect for notifying whether or not the big hit round continues is executed, and that the big hit round is not continued in the round continuation notification effect. Specifically, as the big hit pattern, “16R, big prize opening information 2 (all open long)” and “16R, big prize opening information 3 (1-4R is long open, 5-16R is short open)” Is selected, a predetermined big hit round effect is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 from 1R to 3R of the big hit round, and the round continuation notification effect is executed at the fourth round. If the selected jackpot pattern is “16R, big prize opening release information 2 (all long opening)”, the round continuation notification effect is notified and the round winning prize opening is long open in the fifth and subsequent rounds. If it is opened and the selected jackpot pattern is “16R, big prize opening release information 3 (1 to 4R is long open, 5 to 16R is short open)”, the round non-continuation is notified in the round continuous notification effect, In the rounds after the 5th round, the big prize opening will be opened with a short opening.

When the big prize opening information is not a rank-down effect system value (step A1106; N), the process proceeds to step A1109. If the winning prize opening information is a rank-down effect type value (step A1106; Y), it is determined whether the number of rounds is a special effect round value (for example, 4R) (step A1107).
When the number of rounds is not the value of the special effect round (step A1107; N), the process proceeds to step A1109. Further, when the number of rounds is a value of a special effect round (step A1107; Y), for example, when the number of rounds is 4R, an interval time (for example, 3.6 seconds) for rank-down effect is set (steps). A1108), the process proceeds to step A1109. The number of special rounds is not limited to one, and a plurality of types such as 4R and 8R may be provided.

  Then, the interval time set in step A1104 or A1108 is saved in the special figure game process timer area (step A1109), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 (step A1110) is performed to process the winning ball remaining ball process. Exit.

  On the other hand, if the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (step A1101; Y), a flag is loaded from the special-purpose game mode flag save area that stores the effect mode when the special result is derived (step A1101). A1111), setting the ending time corresponding to the loaded flag, the winning prize opening information and the stop symbol pattern (step A1112), and the set ending time (for example, 1.9 seconds) in the special figure game processing timer area Save (step A1113). Thereafter, a big hit end process transition setting process (step A1114) is performed, and the big winning opening remaining ball process is ended.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2]
FIG. 56 shows the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 (step A1110) in the above-described winning prize remaining ball process. In the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2, first, “3”, which is the process number related to the fanfare / interval process, is set (step A1121), and the process number is saved in the special game process number area (step A1121). A1122).
Next, a signal related to the end of opening of the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1123), and the fanfare / interval The middle process transition setting process 2 is terminated.

[Big jackpot end process transition setting process]
FIG. 57 shows the jackpot end process transition setting process (step A1114) in the above-described winning prize remaining ball process. In the jackpot end process transition setting process, first, “6” is set as the process number related to the jackpot end process (step A1131), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1132). Thereafter, a signal related to the end of opening of the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1133).

  Next, the information on the number-of-winner count area for storing the number of wins to the prize-winning mouth is cleared (step A1134), and the information on the round-number area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step A1135). ), Information on the round number upper limit area storing the upper limit value of the round number in the special gaming state is cleared (step A1136). Then, the information in the round number upper limit information area for storing the flag for determining the upper limit value for the number of rounds is cleared (step A1137), and the big winning opening opening information area for storing the flag for determining the opening information for the big winning opening is stored. The information is cleared (step A1138), and the jackpot end process transition setting process ends.

[Big hits end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end process (step A14) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 58, in this jackpot end process, first, it is determined whether the time reduction determination data is the time reduction operation data (step A1201).
If it is not the short-time operation data (step A1201; N), jackpot end setting process 1 is performed (step A902), and if it is the short-time operation data (step A1201; Y), jackpot end setting process 2 is performed (step A903). . Then, the production mode information address table is set (step A1204), and the address of the table corresponding to the production mode transition information set at the start of variation (when the stop symbol is set) is acquired (step A1205).

  Next, as processing for saving the information necessary for managing the production mode in the game control device 100, first, the production mode number of the production mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the production mode number area. (Step A1206). Further, the effect remaining speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special gaming state is acquired, saved in the effect remaining speed region (step A1207), and the next mode of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state. Transition information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A1208).

  Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A1209), the command is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1210), and an effect command setting process (step A1211) is performed. Here, as the probability information command, there are a plurality of commands that include information on the production mode in any of “high probability / with time reduction” and “high probability / without time reduction”. In the case of the present embodiment, the probabilistic state is always obtained when the big hit ends (so-called ST state). , “High probability / short time / direction mode C” and “High probability / no time / direction mode A” are not used in this process, but “low probability / no time / direction mode A”, “ There are “low probability / no time reduction / direction mode B” and “low probability / no time reduction / direction mode C”.

Next, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the remaining effect rotation speed is prepared (step A1212), and an effect command setting process (step A1213) is performed.
Next, a high-probability variation number command corresponding to the high-probability variation number is prepared (step A1214), and an effect command setting process (step A1215) is performed to determine whether or not a short-time state occurs after the big hit ends (step A1216). .
When the short time state occurs after the big hit (step A1216; Y), the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 is performed (step A1219), and the big hit end process is ended.
Further, when the time-short state does not occur after the big hit (Step A1216; N), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (Step A1217), and after performing the effect command setting process (Step A1218), the special figure normal process transition is performed. A setting process 2 is performed (step A1219), and the jackpot end process ends.

[Big jackpot end setting 1]
FIG. 59 shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A1202) in the above jackpot end process. In this jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal related to the absence of the time-saving state (for example, 2 signals of the big hit) are saved in the external information output data area (step A1221), and a signal related to the start of the high-probability state and the absence of the time-shortening state. (For example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal is OFF, and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF. The status signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1222).

  Next, a number without a short time state is saved in the game state display number area (step A1223), a common low probability flag is saved in the normal game mode flag area (step A1224), and the special game mode flag area is saved. The special figure high probability & no short time flag is saved (step A1225). Thereafter, an initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high probability variation number area (step A1226), and a signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1227), in order to extinguish the right-handed display LED (first gaming state display unit 57), the number of the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A1228), and the jackpot end setting process 1 Exit.

[Big jackpot end setting 2]
FIG. 60 shows jackpot end setting process 2 (step A1203) in the above jackpot end process. In the jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal related to the start of the time-saving state (for example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned ON) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1231). Since the signal related to the start of the short-time state is output from the big hit, it is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous manner. Next, signals related to the start of the high probability state and the short time state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 variation The time shortening state signal is turned on and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1232).

  Next, the number with the short time state is saved in the game state display number area (step A1233), the common figure high probability flag is saved in the ordinary figure game mode flag area (step A1234), and the special figure game mode flag area is saved. The special figure high probability & short time flag is saved (step A1235). Thereafter, an initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high probability variation frequency area (step A1256), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is ended. In the present embodiment, the right-handed mode is set during the short-time state, but since the right-handed mode is set from the big hit, the setting for the right-handed end setting process 2 is not performed.

[Special figure transition setting process 2]
FIG. 61 shows the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step A1219) in the big hit end process described above. In the special figure normal process transition setting process 2, first, “0” is set as the process number related to the special figure normal process (step A1241), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1242). .

  Thereafter, a signal related to the end of the big hit (for example, 1 signal for the big hit is OFF, 3 signals for the big hit is OFF, and 4 signals for the big hit is OFF) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1243). The condition device operating signal OFF, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal OFF, the special symbol 1 signal OFF, and the special symbol 2 signal OFF are saved in the test signal output data area (step A1244). Subsequently, the information in the time reduction determination flag area is cleared (step A1245), the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit is cleared (step A1246), and the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared. (Step A1247). Then, the information of the special figure game mode flag saving area is cleared (step A1248), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1249), and the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 is performed. Exit.

[Small fanfare during processing]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare process (step A15) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 62 (a), in the small hitting fanfare middle process, a small hitting medium process transition setting process (step A1301) is performed.

[Small hit middle processing transition setting processing]
Next, details of the small hitting process transition setting process (step A1301) in the small hitting fanfare medium process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 62 (b), in the small hit / medium process transition setting process, first, “8” related to the small hit / medium process is set as the process number (step A1311), and the process number is designated as the special figure game process. Save in the number area (step A1312).

Next, the opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds) of the big winning opening in the small hit game is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1313), and a signal related to the start of the small hit operation (for example, the special electric accessory 1 The operating signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1314).
Next, in order to open the open / close door 38c of the special variable winning device 38, on-data for turning on the special winning opening solenoid 38b is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1315).
Next, the information of the big winning mouth count number area for storing the number of winning prizes to the big winning mouth is cleared (step A1316), and the small hitting operation initial value (for example, “0”) is saved in the small hitting middle control pointer area. (Step A1317), the small hit middle process transition setting process is terminated.

[Processing during small hits]
Next, the details of the middle hit process (step A16) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 63, in the small hit middle processing, first, the value of the small hit middle control pointer is loaded (step A1401), and the loaded value is equal to or larger than the small hit operation end value (for example, “6”). Is determined (step A1402).
If the loaded value is not equal to or smaller than the small hitting operation end value (step A1402; N), the small hitting control pointer is updated by +1 (step A1403), and the small hitting operation transition setting process (step A1404) is performed. The hit processing ends.

On the other hand, if the loaded value is equal to or greater than the small hitting action end value (step A1402; Y), the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A1405), and the loaded flag has a high special figure probability. It is determined whether it is a flag relating to (Step A1406). Thereby, it is determined whether it is a small hit in the special figure high probability. In this case, it does not matter whether or not the time-short state is in effect.
If the loaded flag is a flag relating to the special figure high probability (step A1406; Y), the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing (step A1409) is performed, and the small hitting medium processing is terminated. In addition, when the loaded flag is not a flag related to the special figure high probability (step A1406; N), a command for a small hit end screen is prepared (step A1407), and an effect command setting process (step A1408) is performed. A small hit remaining ball process transition setting process (step A1409) is performed, and the small hit medium process ends.

[Small hit operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the small hit motion transition setting process (step A1404) in the small hit middle process will be described. As shown in FIG. 64, in the small hitting action transition setting process, a branching process (step A1411) is performed in accordance with the control pointer (control pointer during small hitting).

If the control pointer is “0”, “2”, or “4” in step A1411, the wait time (for example, 1500 milliseconds) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special-purpose game processing timer area (step A1412). The off data is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (step A1413), and the small hitting action transition setting process is terminated.
If the control pointer is “1”, “3”, or “5” in step A1411, the special winning opening opening time (for example, 200 milliseconds) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special-purpose game processing timer area. (Step A1414), the ON data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (Step A1415), and the small hitting action transition setting process is terminated.

Here, in the case of the present embodiment, after the small hit fanfare time of 300 msec, the 200 msec opening and the 1500 msec closing are alternately performed, and the small hitting control pointer is sequentially set at the end of the opening and at the end of the closing. Updated.
Specifically, at the end of the first 200 msec opening (that is, when switching from the first 200 msec opening to the first 1500 msec closing), the small hitting control pointer is updated to “0”. At the end of the first 1500 msec closure (ie, when switching from the first 1500 msec closure to the second 200 msec release), the small hit middle control pointer is updated to “1” and the second 200 msec release is released. The small hitting control pointer is updated to “2” at the end, the small hitting control pointer is updated to “3” at the end of the second 1500 msec closing, and the small hitting control at the end of the third 200 msec release. The pointer is updated to “4”, and the small hitting control pointer is updated to “5” at the end of the third 1500 msec closure. Then, at the end of the fourth 200 msec release, the small hitting control pointer is updated to “6”, and after the elapse of the 1900 msec small hitting remaining ball time and the subsequent 100 msec small hitting ending time, the small hitting The state ends. Therefore, after the fourth 200 msec opening, it is closed for 2000 msec, so the apparent ending time is 2000 msec.

[Small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the small hit remaining ball process transition setting process (step A1409) in the small hit medium process will be described. As shown in FIG. 65, in the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting process, first, “9” related to the small hit remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step A1421), and the processing number is set as the special figure game processing number. Save in the area (step A1422).
Next, the small hit remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1423), and the off data is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (step A1424). The hit remaining ball process transition setting process is terminated.

[Small ball remaining treatment]
Next, the details of the small hit remaining ball process (step A17) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 66A, in the small hit remaining sphere process, a small hit end process shift setting process (step A1501) is performed.

[Small hit end process transition setting process]
Next, details of the small hit end process transition setting process (step A1501) in the small hit remaining ball process will be described. As shown in FIG. 66 (b), in the small hit end process transition setting process, first, “10” related to the small hit end process is set as the process number (step A1511), and the process number is designated as the special figure game process. Save in the number area (step A1512).

Next, the small hitting ending time (for example, 0.1 second) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1513), and a signal relating to the end of the small hitting operation (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is OFF) Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1514).
Next, the information on the winning prize count area is cleared (step A1515), the information on the small hitting middle control pointer area is cleared (for example, 0 cleared) (step A1516), and the small hitting end process transition setting process is ended. .

[Small hit end processing]
Next, details of the small hit end process (step A18) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 67, in the small hit end process, first, a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A1601), and it is determined whether or not the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure high probability ( Step A1602).
If the loaded flag is not a flag related to the high probability of special figure (step A1602; N), an effect mode information address table is set (step A1603), and the effect mode set at the start of variation (when the stop symbol is set) The address of the table corresponding to the migration information is acquired (step A1604).

  Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, saved in the effect mode number area in the RWM (step A776), the effect remaining speed of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, and the effect remaining speed in the RAM is acquired. Save to the area (step A1606), acquire the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transferred, and save in the next mode transition information area in the RWM (step A1607). Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A1608), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1609). When the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1609; Y), the process proceeds to step A1619.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1609; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1610). An effect command setting process (step A1611) is performed.
Next, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the remaining effect rotation speed is prepared (step A1612), and an effect command setting process (step A1613) is performed.
Next, a high probability variation number command corresponding to the high probability variation number is prepared (step A1614), and an effect command setting process (step A1615) is performed.
Next, it is determined whether or not the new effect mode is a left-handed mode (step A1616). If it is not a left-handed mode (step A1616; N), the process proceeds to step A1619. In the left-handed mode (step A1616; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A1617), and after performing the effect command setting process (step A1618), the process of step A1619 is performed. Transition.

Then, a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A1619), and it is determined whether or not the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure short time (short time state) (step A1620).
When the loaded flag is a flag relating to the special figure short time (step A1620; Y), the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A1623) is performed, and the small hit end process is terminated.
If the loaded flag is not a flag related to the special drawing time reduction (step A1620; N), a signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1621) In order to turn off the right-handed display LED (for example, the first gaming state display unit 57), the number in the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A1622). Processing transition setting processing 3 (step A1623) is performed, and the small hitting end processing ends.

[Special Figure Normal Process Transition Setting Process 3]
Next, the details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A1623) in the above-described small hit end process will be described. As shown in FIG. 68, in the special figure normal process transition setting process, first, “0” related to the special figure normal process is set as the process number (step A1631), and the process number is set in the special figure game process number area. Save (step A1632).

Next, a signal relating to the end of the small hit (for example, one signal for the big hit is OFF) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1633), and a signal relating to the end of the small hit (for example, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is OFF) Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1634).
Next, the information of the variation symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A1635), the information of the effect mode transition information area is cleared (step A1636), and the information of the special figure game mode flag saving area is cleared (step A1637).
Next, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1638), and the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 ends.

[Direction command setting processing]
Next, details of the effect command setting process in each process executed during the timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 69, in the effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A2001), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the effect serial transmission buffer status (step A2001).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2002; N), command data (MODE) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2003).

Next, the status serial transmission buffer status is read (step A2004), and it is determined whether the production serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005).
When the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the effect serial transmission buffer status (step A2004).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2005; N), command data (ACTION) is written in the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2006), and the effect command setting process is terminated.
The effect command setting process may be simply referred to as “command setting process”.

[Design variation control processing]
FIG. 70 shows the symbol variation control process (steps A20 and A22) in the above-described special figure game process. The symbol variation control process is a process for controlling the variation of a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, etc.) or a normal symbol (ordinary symbol) and setting display data of the special symbol or the normal symbol.

  In this symbol variation control process, first, it is checked whether or not the variation control flag relating to the symbol to be controlled (for example, any of the first special diagram, the second special diagram, and the ordinary diagram) is changing (step A2101). . In the case of the present embodiment, the lower address of the variation control flag area is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A19 and step A21.

When the changing flag relating to the control target symbol is changing (step A2102; Y), a symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the control target symbol is acquired (step A2103). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for variation) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A19, step A21, and step B14.
Next, the flashing control timer to be controlled is updated by −1 (step A2104), it is determined whether the flashing control timer after update is “0” (step A2105), and the flashing control timer after update is “0”. If not (step A2105; N), display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

  If the updated blinking control timer is “0” (step A2105; Y), the blinking control timer initial value (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the blinking control timer area to be controlled (step A2106), and control is performed. The target variation symbol number is updated by +1 (step A2108), and display data corresponding to the value of the variation symbol number region to be controlled is acquired (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the changing flag relating to the control target symbol is not changing (step A2102; N), a symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the control target symbol is acquired (step A2109). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for stopping) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A19, step A21, and step B14.
Next, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2110), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

[Distribution processing]
FIG. 71 shows the sorting process (steps A476, A479, A485) in the above-described variation pattern setting process. Based on the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the distribution process selects the latter half fluctuation selection table of the special figure fluctuation display game from the latter half fluctuation group table, or the special figure fluctuation display game from the latter half fluctuation selection table based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2. For selecting the first half variation pattern (first half variation number) of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation selection table based on the variation pattern random number 3. is there.

  In this distribution process, first, the first data of the target selection table (the latter half variation group table prepared in step A472, the latter half variation selection table prepared in step A477, or the first half variation selection table prepared in step A483). Is a code without distribution (ie, “0”) (step A2201). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table, the latter half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table are associated with at least one latter half fluctuation selection table, the second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number), and the first half fluctuation pattern (first half fluctuation number). In the case of a selection table that does not require distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top.

If the first data of the target selection table (second-half variation group table, second-half variation selection table, or first-half variation selection table) is a code without distribution (step A2202; Y), the data corresponding to the distribution result is stored. The address is updated (step A2207), and the distribution process is terminated.
On the other hand, if the first data of the target selection table (second-half fluctuation group table, second-half fluctuation selection table, or first-half fluctuation selection table) is not an unsorted code (step A2202; N), the target selection table (second-half fluctuation group table) The first distribution value specified in the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is acquired (step A2203).

  Subsequently, a new random value is obtained by subtracting the distribution value obtained in step A2203 from the random value prepared in steps A473, A478, and A484 (the value of fluctuation pattern random number 1, fluctuation pattern random number 2, and fluctuation pattern random number 3). Is calculated (step A2204), and it is determined whether the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A2205). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (step A2205; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A2206), the process proceeds to step A2203, and thereafter Process.

In other words, the distribution value specified next in the target selection table (second-half variation group table, second-half variation selection table, or first-half variation selection table) is acquired (step A2203), and then determined in the previous step A2205. A new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value from the random value (step A2204), and it is determined whether the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A2205).
The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A2205 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A2205; Y). As a result, at least one second-half fluctuation selection table, second-half fluctuation pattern (second-half fluctuation number) or first-half fluctuation pattern (first-half fluctuation pattern) specified in the target selection table (second-half fluctuation group table, second-half fluctuation selection table, or first-half fluctuation selection table). Any one of the latter half variation selection table, the latter half variation pattern (the latter half variation number), or the first half variation pattern (the first half variation number) is selected from among the (variation numbers).
If it is determined in step A2205 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A2205; Y), the address is updated to the data address corresponding to the result of the distribution (step A2207), and the distribution process ends. To do.

[2-byte sort processing]
FIG. 72 shows the 2-byte sorting process (step A475) in the above-described variation pattern setting process. The 2-byte sorting process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

  In this 2-byte distribution process, first, it is checked whether or not the top data of the selection table (second-half fluctuation group table prepared in step A472) is a code without distribution (ie, “0”) (step A2301). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation selection table, but only the latter half fluctuation selection table in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach” is defined. In the variation group table (for example, a part of the variation group table when the result is out of order), since there is no need for distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top. .

If the first data of the selection table (second-half variation group table) is a code without distribution (step A2302; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A2307), 2 bytes The distribution process ends.
On the other hand, if the first data of the selection table (second-half variation group table) is not a code without distribution (step A2302; N), the first distribution value specified in the selection table (second-half variation group table) is acquired. (Step A2303).

Subsequently, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A2303 from the random value prepared in step A473 (the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1) (step A2304), and the calculated new random value is calculated. It is determined whether the numerical value is smaller than “0” (step A2305). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (step A2305; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A2306), the process proceeds to step A2303, and thereafter Process.
That is, the distribution value specified next in the selection table (second half variation group table) is acquired (step A2303), and then the distribution value is subtracted from the random number value determined in the previous step A2305 to obtain a new value. A random number value is calculated (step A2304), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A2305).

The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A2305 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A2305; Y). As a result, any one of the latter half variation selection tables is selected from at least one latter half variation selection table defined in the selection table (the latter half variation group table).
If it is determined in step A2305 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A2305; Y), the address is updated to the data address corresponding to the distribution result (step A2307), and the 2-byte distribution process is performed. Exit.
The configuration of the distribution process shown in FIG. 71 is basically the same as the configuration of the 2-byte distribution process shown in FIG. 72, but the size of the random number used for the distribution is 1 byte or 2 bytes. Therefore, the program instructions for calculation are different.

  Next, control executed by the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control apparatus 300 will be described. Control processing by the main control microcomputer 311 mainly includes main processing shown in FIG. 73 and timer interrupt processing (not shown).

[Main processing]
In the main process, as shown in FIG. 73, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the processing at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and an interrupt is permitted (step C4). Next, the generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7).

  After the processing at the start of the program from steps C1 to C7, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, a WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, effect button input processing (step C9) for creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 is performed. The input from the effect button 25 is read in the timer interrupt process. In this effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25, a process of changing the effect content is performed.

  Then, hall / player setting mode processing is performed for accepting operations such as setting of changeable ranges such as the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal, and changing the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal by the player (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) for updating the random number for determining the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed (step C11), and a command received from the game control device 100 is analyzed and a response is received ( Step C12) is performed.

  Next, the effect display editing process (step C13) is performed, and the drawing command preparation end is set (step C14). In the effect display editing process, various data are updated in accordance with the content to be drawn, and so on until the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If drawing data of a screen to be drawn within 1/30 seconds (about 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

  Then, it is determined whether or not it is a frame switching timing (step C15). In this embodiment, in order to create a system cycle (1 frame 1/30 seconds), it is determined that it is the frame switching timing when the V blank interrupt (1/60 seconds) is entered twice. Note that the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, image updating (frame switching) may be performed at 1/60 seconds, or image updating (frames) at a timing later than 1/60 seconds. Switching). If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

  Thereafter, a sound control process (step C17) for performing control related to the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), decoration for performing LED control of the panel decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, and the progress notification device 600. Control processing (step C18), movable body control processing (step C19) for controlling the motor and solenoid of the board effect device 44 are performed, and the process returns to the processing for clearing WDT (step C8).

[Received command check processing]
FIG. 74 shows the received command check process (step C12) in the main process described above. In this received command check process, first, a command reception counter value that counts how many commands are received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the command reception number (step C31), and the command reception is performed. It is determined whether the number is not 0 (step C32). If it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C32; N), the received command check process ends. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C32; Y), the content of the command reception counter area is subtracted by the number of received commands (step C33).

  Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C34), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C35), and the command copy for the number of received commands is completed. Is determined (step C36). As described above, in this embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the reception command buffer, the contents of the reception command buffer are copied to the command area (analysis RAM area), and the command analysis is performed in the command area. It is configured as follows. Thereby, in preparation for the case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command, it is possible to move the command (data) and create a space. In addition, command analysis can be performed collectively in a round of main processing.

  If it is determined in step C36 that command copying for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C36; N), the process returns to step C34. If it is determined that the command copy for the number of received commands has been completed (step C36; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C37), and the received command analysis process (step C38) is performed.

  Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C39), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of the command for the number of received commands is completed (step C40). If it is determined that command analysis for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C40; N), the process returns to step C37. If it is determined that the command analysis for the number of received commands has been completed (step C40; Y), the received command check process is terminated. As described above, in the received command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In the present embodiment, up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 75 shows the received command analysis process (step C38) in the received command check process described above. In this received command analysis process, first, the command upper byte is separated as MODE and the lower byte as ACT (ACTION) (step C51), and it is determined whether or not the MODE is in the normal range (step C52). If it is determined that MODE is in the normal range (step C52; Y), it is determined whether ACT is in the normal range (step C53). If it is determined that the ACT is in the normal range (step C53; Y), it is determined whether or not the ACT for the MODE is a correct combination (step C54).

  If it is determined in step C52 that MODE is not in the normal range (step C52; N), if ACT is determined not to be in the normal range in step C53 (step C53; N), or in step C54, the response to MOED If it is determined that ACT is not a correct combination (step C54; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C54 that the ACT for the MODE is a correct combination (step C54; Y), it is determined whether or not the MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C55). If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C55; Y), the variable command processing (step C56) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C55 that MODE is not in the range of the variable command (step C55; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the big hit command (step C57). When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the jackpot command (step C57; Y), the jackpot command processing (step C58) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C57 that MODE is not in the range of the jackpot command (step C57; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the design command range (step C59). If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the symbol-related command (step C59; Y), symbol-related command processing (step C60) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C59 that MODE is not in the range of symbol-based commands (step C59; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of single-shot commands such as a pending number command and an error command. (Step C61). If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the single command (step C61; Y), the single command processing (step C62) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

In the single-shot command processing (step C62), a special figure for performing processing related to the special figure 1 hold generated when the special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold (first start memory) is received. A special figure 2 hold information setting process for performing a process related to the special figure 2 hold generated when a special figure hold number command corresponding to the 1 hold information setting process or the special figure 2 hold (second start memory) is received. included. In the special figure 1 hold information setting process and the special figure 2 hold information setting process, a process of displaying the decorative special figure start storage displays 81 and 82 corresponding to the generated hold on the display device 41 is performed.
That is, the production control device 300 serves as a start memory notification means for performing a start memory notification display for displaying information related to the start memory by a start memory display corresponding to each start memory.

  If it is determined in step C61 that MODE is not in the range of the single-shot command (step C61; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the pre-read symbol command (step C63). If it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the pre-read symbol command (step C63; Y), the pre-read symbol command processing (step C64) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C63 that MODE is not within the range of the pre-read symbol system command (step C63; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the pre-read variation command (step C65). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the prefetch fluctuation command (step C65; Y), the prefetch fluctuation command processing (step C66) is performed, and the received command analysis process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step C65 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetching variation command (step C65; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

[Pre-reading design command processing]
FIG. 76 shows the look-ahead symbol system command process (step C64) in the received command analysis process described above. In this pre-read symbol system command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the latest hold information is special figure 1 hold (step C71). That is, it is determined whether the latest prefetch command received this time is related to the first start memory.

  When the latest hold information is special figure 1 hold (step C71; Y), the command is saved in the special figure 1 prefetch symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number (step C72), and a prefetch fluctuation command reception waiting flag is stored. Is set (step C74), and the look-ahead design command processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the latest hold information is not special figure 1 hold (step C71; N), that is, when it is related to special figure 2 hold (second start memory), special command 2 corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is shown. The prefetch symbol command area is saved (step C73), the prefetch variation command reception waiting flag is set (step C74), and the prefetch symbol command processing is terminated.
That is, the production control device 300 serves as production information storage and holding means capable of storing and holding the prior determination result information transmitted by the control information transmission means (game control device 100).

[Read-ahead variation command processing]
FIG. 77 shows the look-ahead variation command processing (step C66) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this prefetch fluctuation command processing, first, it is determined whether or not reception of a prefetch fluctuation command is awaited (step C81). Here, when there is a prefetch fluctuation command reception wait flag set in the above-mentioned prefetch symbol system command processing, it is determined that reception is awaiting. If the prefetch fluctuation command reception is not awaited (step C81; N), the prefetch fluctuation command processing is terminated. If the prefetch fluctuation command reception wait is in progress (step C81; Y), the prefetch fluctuation command reception wait flag is cleared (step C82).

Thereafter, in the processes of steps C83 to C86, a process of converting the prefetch change command received from the game control apparatus 100 so as to be convenient for the process in the effect control apparatus 300 is performed.
First, by the process (step C83) of setting the prefetch fluctuation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of symbols held in the latest hold information (step C83), the special type of the start memory corresponding to the prefetch fluctuation command received this time (see special figure 1 or special figure). A MODE conversion table for converting MODE is set according to the information in FIG. 2) and the current number of reservations of the special figure type.
Then, with reference to the set MODE conversion table, the in-sub-prefetch fluctuation command MODE corresponding to the prefetch fluctuation command MODE is acquired (step C84).
Further, a prefetch variation ACT conversion table is set (step C85), and the sub-in-prefetch conversion command ACT corresponding to the ACT of the prefetch variation command is acquired (step C86).

The MODE contains information on the first half fluctuation, but since the contents and time of the first half fluctuation set based on this MODE vary depending on the number of holds at the time of judgment, the judgment at the time of prior judgment and the start of the special figure fluctuation display game The determination result may differ depending on the determination of time.
Therefore, in order to be able to easily and reliably perform the pre-reading effect process without being affected by the number of holds at the time of determination, the MODE is converted in a conversion mode according to the current number of holds, and the hold at the time of determination It can be handled in common regardless of the number.
For example, “Without reach, there is a possibility of a short first-half fluctuation time depending on the status of holding”, or “Without reach, it has a long first-half fluctuation time regardless of the status of holding. As described above, it is converted into MODE divided by items to be considered in the setting of the prefetch effect so that the prefetch effect processing can be easily and reliably performed.

In addition, the ACT includes information on the latter half fluctuation such as the presence / absence of reach and the type of reach. The content of the latter-half fluctuation set based on this ACT does not change depending on the number of holds at the time of determination.
However, for example, even in the case of normal reach, the final stop symbol is set to the stop that stops one frame before the reach symbol, the stop that stops one frame ahead, and the hit case, so various types of reach can be used for the same type of reach. Since the ACT corresponding to each of these is set, the range of values is wide.
For this reason, by converting ACTs corresponding to the reach of the same system to the same ACT, the number is reduced, and the processing load such as the check in the pre-reading effect process is reduced.

After such conversion, it is determined whether the converted MODE and ACT are other than 0 (step C87). If neither MODE nor ACT after conversion is other than 0 (step C87; N), since the command value is abnormal, the prefetching variation command processing is terminated.
If the converted MODE and ACT are both other than 0 (step C87; Y), the converted command is the latest pending information, the prefetch fluctuation command area corresponding to the pending number (see FIG. The data is saved in the look-ahead change command area in FIG. 2 (step C88). Note that MODE and ACT before conversion may also be stored together.

Next, prefetch command consistency check processing (step C89) is performed to determine whether the combination of MODE and ACT (command combination) is normal. If the command combination is not normal (step C90; N), the prefetch fluctuation command The process ends.
If the command combination is normal (step C90; Y), a prefetch lottery process (step C91) for lottery of the presence / absence of execution of the prefetch notice effect and the contents is performed to determine whether the prefetch notice effect is generated (step C91). Step C92).

If no prefetching notice effect is generated (step C92; N), the prefetching variation command process is terminated.
When a pre-reading notice effect is generated (step C92; Y), it is determined whether the effect starts immediately (step C93).
The effect that starts immediately is, for example, a pre-reading notice effect that changes the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display 81, 82, and the effect that does not start immediately is a pre-reading notice effect that is performed during the execution of the special figure variation display game. That is, an effect that continuously generates a specific effect or reach state over a plurality of special figure variable display games, an effect that a notice is given by a character appearing during variable display, and the like.

If it is not an effect that starts immediately (step C93; N), the prefetch fluctuation command processing is terminated. In this case, a notice is set at the start of a special figure change display game that executes a prefetch notice effect.
If the effect starts immediately (step C93; Y), a scenario layer number corresponding to the selected prefetch effect is prepared (step C94), and the address of the scenario data table corresponding to the selected prefetch effect is prepared. Is prepared (step C95). Thereafter, scenario data setting processing is performed (step C96), and the prefetch fluctuation command processing is terminated.

[Pre-fetch lottery processing]
FIG. 78 shows a prefetch lottery process (step C91) in the prefetch fluctuation command process described above. In this prefetch lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not the prefetch lottery can be executed (step C111). In the present embodiment, the case where the prefetch lottery can be executed means that the prefetch effect is not being executed. This condition can be arbitrarily set.

When the pre-read lottery can be executed (step C111; Y), it is determined whether the hold information about the hold to be processed that is the hold that has received the pre-read fluctuation command this time is the special figure 2 hold (second start memory). If it is determined (step C112) that the special figure 2 is on hold (step C112; Y), it is determined whether or not it is in the effect mode that can be prefetched in the special figure fluctuation display game based on the special figure 2 hold (step C113). ). The effect mode capable of pre-reading effects in the present embodiment is an effect mode in a short time state.
When the special mode fluctuation display game based on the special figure 2 suspension is not in the effect mode capable of prefetching (step C113; N), the prefetch lottery process is terminated.
Further, when the special mode variation display game based on the special figure 2 hold is in the effect mode capable of prefetching (step C113; Y), or when the hold information to be processed is not the special figure 2 hold (step C112; N) That is, if the special figure 1 is on hold, all of the prefetch control areas are cleared to 0 (step C114), and the prefetch variation command of the whole hold of the same type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) as the processing target hold is loaded ( Step C115).

Then, a prefetch variation combination confirmation process for confirming whether or not the content of the variation based on each suspension (special figure variation display game) can execute the prefetch effect from the prefetch variation command of each suspension is performed (step C116). It is determined whether the combination of fluctuations that can be performed (step C117).
If it is not a combination of fluctuations that can perform the pre-reading effect (step C117; N), the pre-read lottery process is terminated. When it is not a combination of fluctuations that can perform a pre-reading effect, if the hold that is digested before the processing target hold that received the pre-reading change command this time gives a more reliable reach effect, or the processing target hold However, there are cases in which there is a possibility that inconsistency in the production may occur if the pre-reading effect is performed.

In the case of a combination of changes that can perform prefetching effects (step C117; Y), a prefetch lottery group address table corresponding to the pending prefetch symbol command to be processed is obtained (step C118), and the prefetch lottery group address obtained is obtained. Based on the table, a prefetch lottery group table corresponding to the ACT of the prefetch variation command is acquired (step C119).
The case of a combination of fluctuations that can perform a pre-reading effect is a case in which all the suspensions that are digested before the suspension to be processed are shifted without reach.

The pre-reading symbol command referred to in step C118 includes a determination result that can identify the result of the special figure variation display game based on the hold and the probability state that brings the result, that is, the low probability state or the high probability state, In either the low probability state or the high probability state, information on either big hit or big hit only in the high probability state is included, and a prefetch lottery group address table is acquired based on this information.
In the prefetch lottery group table acquired based on the prefetch lottery group address table in step C119, the types of prefetch effects that can be executed and the selection probabilities are defined, but only in the high probability state of the prefetch lottery group tables. The table selected in the case of a big hit does not include a specific advance notice effect which is a pre-reading effect for definite notification of the big hit.

  This is because when the pre-reading effect for the special figure 1 suspension is performed in the high probability state, the high probability state is ended by executing the specified number of special figure fluctuation display games, and the probability state is the high probability state. This is because there is a possibility of changing from a low probability state to a low probability state. In other words, special figure 1 suspension, which is a big hit only in a high probability state, was a big hit at the start of the pre-reading effect, but it will be lost due to a change in the probability state, so the big hit will be notified definitely. A specific advance notice effect that is a pre-reading effect to be performed is not performed.

In the conventional gaming machine, the prefetching inconsistency is prevented by restricting the prefetching from a predetermined number of games before the timing at which the probability state changes, such as the high probability state ends at a specified number of times. Since the game machine has a look-ahead result including the probability state, a look-ahead effect other than a specific advance notice effect can be performed.
In addition, with regard to a hold that becomes a big hit in the low probability state and the high probability state, a specific prior notice effect that straddles the timing when the probability state changes is also possible.

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine in which a jackpot that becomes a low probability state is set after the special gaming state ends, a specific advance notice effect is not performed for the special figure 1 suspension that is a jackpot only in a high probability state. As a result, when a pre-reading effect for the special figure 1 hold is performed in the high probability state, the special figure 2 hold occurs, and the special figure 2 hold causes a big hit and the probability state is changed from the high probability state. It is possible to prevent a contradiction from occurring when changing to a low probability state.
In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that performs a lottery to a low probability state in a high probability state, a pre-reading effect that definitely notifies the jackpot about the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold that are big hit only in the high probability state It is preferable not to perform a specific advance notice effect.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the acquired address is undefined data (step C120). If it is not undefined data (step C120; N), a notice lottery process for lottery of presence / absence of pre-reading effect and type of effect is performed. Perform (Step C121).
And as a result of the lottery, when the prefetching advance notice is not performed (step C122; N), the prefetching lottery process is terminated. If the acquired address is undefined data (step C120; Y), the prefetching lottery process is terminated with no prefetching notice (step C122; N).
Further, in the case of performing the pre-reading notice (step C122; Y), the number of pre-reading effects, which is the number of executions of the special figure variable display game for executing the pre-reading effects based on the hold information to be processed, is set (step C123) and determined. The execution flag of the pre-reading effect thus performed is set (step C124), and the pre-read lottery process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the prefetch lottery cannot be executed (step C111; N), it is determined whether the hold information to be processed is special figure 2 hold (second start memory) (step C125), and not special figure 2 hold. In the case (step C125; N), the prefetch lottery is terminated.
If the special figure 2 is on hold (step C125; Y), it is determined whether a pre-reading effect for performing an interrupt effect in the special figure fluctuation display game based on the special figure 2 hold is being executed (step C126).

The pre-reading effect in which the interrupting effect is performed in the special-figure display game based on the special figure 2 hold is a pre-reading effect based on the special figure 1 hold (first start memory), and the special read based on the special figure 2 hold that is executed by interruption. This is a look-ahead effect that can execute an effect related to the figure variation display game.
When the pre-reading effect in which the interrupting effect is performed in the special-figure display game based on the special figure 2 hold is not being executed (step C126; N), the pre-read lottery process is terminated.
In addition, when a prefetching effect for performing an interrupting effect is being executed in the special map fluctuation display game based on the special figure 2 hold (step C126; Y), the prefetch control area corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is being executed. The prefetch effect information is saved (step C127), and the prefetch lottery process is terminated.
In step C127, an effect related to the pre-read effect being executed, which is to be performed in the special figure fluctuation display game based on the special figure 2 suspension, is set. As such an effect, for example, the same effect as the prefetching effect being executed is set.

With the above processing, the advance notice effect that can suggest and inform the player of the information about the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory is set. That is, the production control device 300 serves as a prior notice production means capable of executing the advance notice production.
Further, the effect control device 300 serves as a prior notice effect determination means capable of making a determination on the advance notice effect based on the prior determination result information transmitted by the control information transmission means (game control device 100), and Based on the determination result of the advance notice effect determining means, the advance notice effect executing means capable of executing the advance notice effect is provided.

  Based on the above, based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening (start winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37), the variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner is executed, and the result of the variable display game is A gaming machine capable of generating a special game state that gives a player a predetermined game value when a special result is obtained, and the probability state in which the special result occurs includes a normal probability state and the normal probability state. Higher probability state, and is configured to be able to generate a high probability state after the end of the special gaming state, and the right to execute the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball at the starting winning opening is memorized Can be stored up to a predetermined upper limit number, and a start storage means (game control device 100) for storing a predetermined random number corresponding to the start storage, and a predetermined random number stored in the start storage means Based on memory A pre-determining means (game control device 100) capable of making a determination before the dynamic display game is executed, and a pre-notification producing means (production control device 300) capable of executing an advance notice producing effect, The prior determination unit is configured to be able to determine a predetermined random number corresponding to the start-up memory based on a determination value corresponding to the normal probability state and a determination value corresponding to the high probability state. The notice effect means is information indicating that the pre-determination result by the pre-determination means and the pre-determination result information including information that can identify the probability state that brings about the pre-determination result is a special result only in the high probability state If there is, it is possible to regulate the execution of a specific advance notice effect indicating that the special result occurs. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the production from being inconsistent due to the change in the probability state, thereby reducing the player's expectation and interest, and improving the interest of the game.

[Variable command processing]
FIG. 79 shows the variable command process (step C56) in the received command analysis process described above. In this variable command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure type is unconfirmed (step C131).
The special figure type is either special figure 1 or special figure 2. If this special figure type is unconfirmed (step C131; Y), the variable command processing is terminated.
When the special figure type is not yet determined (step C131; N), a variation pattern corresponding symbol determination process is performed (step C132).

  In the variation pattern corresponding symbol determination process (step C132), it is determined whether or not the variation pattern specified by the variation command matches the symbol type specified by the decorative special symbol command. Symbol types include outliers, 16R probability variation symbols, 2R probability variation symbols, 11R probability variation symbols, etc., and variation patterns include variation patterns for loss, variation patterns for specific symbol types, etc., both received commands It is determined whether the contents of are consistent.

If the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (step C133; Y), the variation command processing is terminated because it is an abnormality.
The case of inconsistency is, for example, a case in which a decoration special figure command with a 16R probability variation pattern has been received even though a deviation fluctuation command has been received, and a case in which a contradiction occurs in performing an effect.
If the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C133; N), a variation effect setting process is performed (step C134), and the special symbol variation is set as the P machine state (step C135). The process ends.

[Variation production setting processing]
FIG. 80 shows the changing effect setting process (step C134) in the above-described changing command process. In this variation effect setting process, first, a variation pattern classification process is performed (step C141), the notice distribution table 1 corresponding to the main pattern and various kinds of effect information is prepared (step C142), and the notice lottery process (step C143). I do.
The notice allocation table 1 defines types of notices to be made at the start of fluctuations such as reach notices and step-up notices, and selection probabilities for each notice. In the notice lottery process, notice lotteries are performed based on this table.

Next, the notice allocation table 2 corresponding to the major patterns and various types of effect information is prepared (step C144), and the notice lottery process (step C145) is performed.
The notice allocation table 2 defines effects corresponding to the effect modes, effects accompanying the operation of the effect button 25, and selection probabilities for each effect. .

Then, it is determined whether or not the main pattern is normally shifted (step C146), and when it is normally shifted (step C146; Y), that is, when the reach state is not reached, a prefetch effect promotion determination process (step C149) is performed. .
When the main pattern is not normally out of alignment (step C146; N), that is, when reaching the reach state, the preliminary distribution table 3 corresponding to the main pattern and various production information is prepared (step C147), and the preliminary lottery Processing (step C148) is performed, and pre-reading effect promotion determination processing (step C149) is performed.
The notice allocation table 3 defines notices to be made during reach and selection probabilities for each notice. In the notice lottery process, the notice lottery is performed based on this table.

In the pre-reading effect promotion determination process (step C149), when the hold that is the target of the pre-reading effect is a big hit, the big hit is definitely determined when the special figure variation display game based on the hold is started. A lottery is performed to promote the pre-reading effect to the effect to be notified.
Note that the hold change notice, which is a look-ahead effect performed by changing the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory displays 81 and 82, is erased at the start of the change of the hold of the notice object and cannot be promoted, so is excluded. The However, if there is a digestion hold display area 83 for displaying hold information corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game being executed, it may be a target (see FIG. 82).

Thereafter, a notice effect setting process (step C150) and a notice scenario data setting process (step C151) are performed to set various information about the notice and effects set in each of the above processes, and the special figure type is special figure 2. It is determined whether there is a certain variation (step C152).
When the special figure type is special figure 2 (step C152; Y), an index of the special figure 2 suspension motion control table is calculated in order to produce an effect of decreasing the corresponding second decorative special figure start memory display 82. Then, save (step C153) and save the index of the motion control table for the fourth symbol (figure 2) to control the variation of the fourth symbol (step C154).
Further, when the special figure type is not special figure 2 (step C152; N), in order to perform an effect of reducing the corresponding first decorative special figure start memory display 81, the index of the special figure 1 suspension motion control table is set. Calculate and save (step C155), and save the index of the motion control table for the 4th symbol (special Fig. 1 variation) to control the variation of the 4th symbol (step C156).

Then, the value of the stop symbol area of the decorative special symbol variation display game is saved in the current symbol region (step C157), a variation pattern start setting process is performed (step C158), and the decorative special symbol variation display game is started.
Further, if the number of pre-read effects for managing the number of games for which the pre-read effects are executed is not 0, -1 is updated (step C159), and it is determined whether the number of pre-read effects is 0 (step C160).

As a result of the update, when the number of pre-read effects is not 0 (step C160; N), the variation effect setting process is terminated.
If the number of pre-read effects is 0 due to the update (step C160; Y), the pre-read effects in-execution flag is cleared because the pre-read effects are the last in the special figure fluctuation display game (step C161). The effect setting process ends. The pre-reading effect execution flag may be cleared at the end of the special figure variation display game in which the number of pre-reading effects is zero.

  Through the above processing, the notice effect in the special figure variation display game that starts variation is set and executed. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as a notice effect unit capable of executing a predetermined notice effect.

[Pre-reading effect promotion judgment processing]
FIG. 81 shows a prefetch effect promotion determination process (step C149) in the above-described variation effect setting process. In this pre-reading effect promotion determination process, first, it is determined whether the pre-reading effect is being executed (step C171). If the pre-reading effect is not being executed (step C171; N), the pre-reading effect promotion determination process is terminated.
When the pre-reading effect is being executed (step C171; Y), it is determined whether the effect being executed is a pending change notice that is performed by changing the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display 81, 82. (Step C172).

If it is a pending change notice (step C172; Y), the pre-reading effect promotion determination process ends. The hold change notice is excluded because it is erased at the start of the change of hold of the notice subject and cannot be promoted.
If it is not a pending change notice (step C172; N), it is determined whether the change is a prefetched book hold (a notice target hold) (step C173).
The pre-reading effect that is not a pending change notice is an effect that continuously generates a specific effect or reach state over a plurality of special figure change display games, an effect that makes a notice by a character appearing during change display, or the like.

If the hold is not a pre-read main hold (step C173; N), the pre-reading effect promotion determination process ends.
If the hold is a pre-read book hold (step C173; Y), it is determined whether the change is a big hit (step C174).

If the change is not a big hit (step C174; N), the pre-reading effect promotion determination process ends.
If the change is a big hit (step C174; Y), a promotion lottery table corresponding to the pre-reading effect being executed is set (step C175), a preliminary lottery process is performed (step C176), and the lottery result is currently It is determined whether it is the same as the notice being executed (step C177).
In the promotion lottery table, no change and a plurality of finalized effects and their respective selection probabilities are defined. In the notice lottery process, a notice lottery is performed based on this table.

If the lottery result is the same as the currently executed notice (step C177; Y), that is, if no change is selected as a result of the notice lottery and the effect is not changed, the prefetch effect promotion determination process is terminated.
If the lottery result is not the same as the currently executed notice (step C177; N), the lottery result is replaced with the execution flag of the determined prefetch effect (step C178), and it is determined whether the notice is currently being displayed (step C178). Step C179).

If it is not a notice that is currently being displayed (step C179; N), the pre-reading effect promotion determination process ends. In this case, the effect is set based on the in-execution flag replaced in step C178 when the notice is executed.
If the notice is currently being displayed (step C179; Y), a scenario layer number corresponding to the determined prefetch effect is prepared (step C180), and the scenario data table corresponding to the determined prefetch effect is prepared. An address is prepared (step C181). Thereafter, scenario data setting processing is performed (step C182), and the prefetch effect promotion determination processing is terminated. In this case, the notice being displayed is immediately changed by these processes.

By this pre-reading effect promotion determination process, it is possible to change the notice effect for the special figure variation display game whose result is a big hit. As the effect after the change, it is possible to select a specific notice effect for definite notification of the big hit. Of course, even if the result is a big hit, it is not necessary to select a specific notice effect, and even if a selectable effect is selected among a plurality of types of specific notice effects and other notice effects good.
As a result, when the pre-reading result is a result that is a big hit only in a high probability state as described above, a specific advance notice effect that informs the big hit definitely is controlled in order to prevent inconsistency of the notice. Even so, it is possible to execute a specific notice effect that definitely notifies the big hit. In other words, after confirming that the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start-up memory to be notified is a big hit, a specific notice effect that notifies the big hit definitely is executed, and the notice does not contradict. .

In the pre-reading effect promotion determination process, the hold change notice is excluded from the promotion, but the case where it has the digestion hold display area 83 for displaying the hold information corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game being executed is the target. It is also good.
In the example shown in FIG. 82, a first decoration special figure start memory display 81 corresponding to the special figure 1 hold is displayed on the left side of the lower center of the display device 41, and a second corresponding to the special figure 2 hold on the right side from the center. A decorative special figure start memory display 82 is displayed. Here, since there are three special figure 1 reservations, three first decoration special figure start memory displays 81 corresponding to each are displayed, and since there are zero special figure 2 reservations, a second special figure start storage display 82 is displayed. Is not displayed.

A digestion hold display area 83 for displaying the hold information corresponding to the currently executed special figure variation display game is provided between the first decorative special figure start memory display 81 and the second decorative special figure start memory display 82. Is provided.
In the digestion hold display area 83, the first decoration special figure start memory display 81 or the second decoration special figure start memory display 82 corresponding to the start of the special figure variation display game flows and is displayed. Done. The decoration special figure start memory displays 81 and 82 that have flowed into the digestion hold display area 83 can be displayed in the digestion hold display area 83 in a state in which the hold change notice is maintained, if a hold change notice has been made.
Moreover, it is also possible to change to a display for notifying information related to the special figure variation display game being executed at a predetermined timing.

When the advance of the hold change notice is set, for example, as shown in FIG. 82 (a), the notice is given as shown in FIG. 82 (b) from the state where no notice is given in the digestion hold display area 83. Change to a state.
By doing in this way, when a specific advance notice effect that informs definitely about the big hit about the hold that becomes a big hit only in a high probability state is not performed, the big hit is definitely determined in the digestion hold display area 83. It is also possible to perform the same effect as a specific prior notice effect to be notified, and to have a sense of expectation for the pending change notice.
In particular, in the case of a big hit (first win) when not in the short-time state, the first special figure change display game after the end of the special game state is very likely to be based on the special figure hold, so the digestion hold By making it possible to execute an effect in the display area 93, the effect can be reliably performed even in the case of a big hit in this special figure variation display game.

  From the above, the start winning opening is the first starting winning opening (start winning opening 36) and the second starting winning opening (normally variable winning device 37) that can be changed between a winning possible state and a winning impossible state. The start storage means (game control device 100) can store up to a predetermined upper limit as the first start memory the right to execute the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening. There is also a right to execute a variable display game based on the first start storage means (game control device 100) for storing a predetermined random number corresponding to the start storage and the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening. Can be stored as a second start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number, and a second start storage means (game control device 100) for storing a predetermined random number corresponding to the start memory is provided. Means and second starting storage means A runtime determination means (game control device 100) capable of determining the stored predetermined random number based on a determination value corresponding to the probability state at the time of execution of the variable display game based on the start memory; Priority control means (game control device 100) for executing the variable display game based on the start memory in preference to the variable display game based on the first start memory, and notice effect means capable of executing a predetermined notice effect (effect control) Device 300), and the advance notice producing means (production control device 300) is configured to be capable of regulating the execution of the specific advance notice effect relating to the first start-up memory. When the execution time determination result by the time determination means is information indicating that a special result is generated, execution of a specific advance notice effect relating to the first start memory is regulated by the advance notice effect means. Even if it is, so that the special result it is possible to perform specific announcement attraction showing that occur.

  Therefore, even when execution of a specific advance notice effect is restricted, it is possible to execute a specific notice effect indicating that a special result is generated based on the execution time determination result by the execution time determination means. Because there is, you can improve the interest of the game.

Note that the gaming machine of this embodiment is always in a high probability state (ST state) after the end of the special gaming state, but depending on the type of jackpot, it should not be in a high probability state after the end of the special gaming state. May be.
In addition, a specific prior notice effect for declaring a big hit for a hold determined to be a big hit only in a high probability state only for a special figure 1 hold that is not preferentially digested in the case of a high probability state is regulated. Anyway.
In addition to this, in the case where there is a possibility that a plurality of special figure 2 suspensions may occur due to the normally variable winning device 37 being opened over a long period of time in a low probability state (Fuji Electric Long Open) For the special figure 1 hold, a specific prior notice effect for the hold determined to be a big hit only in a high probability state may be regulated.

In addition, with respect to a hold that is a big hit only when the pre-determined result is a high probability state, a specific advance notice effect for notifying the big hit is not performed (not set in the table), but some other notice effect is performed ( There is a case to be selected.
For this reason, for example, with respect to a hold that was a big hit only in a high probability state, a pre-reading effect may be performed in a manner that considers changes due to promotion later. For example, for a hold that is a big hit only in a high probability state, the effect that the egg seems to crack as a hold change notice is performed, and it is decided that it will be a big hit by the judgment at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the hold In such a case, the reserved change notice may be promoted so that the egg breaks and the confirmed notification character appears.
Further, a sub display device that displays information related to the game may be provided separately from the display device 41, and the pre-reading effect display may be performed on the sub display device.

[First Modification]
Next, a first modification of the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly different portions. explain. The gaming machine of this modification can reset the pre-reading effect for the start-up memory stored after the special gaming state ends.

[Big hit command processing]
FIG. 83 shows the jackpot command process (step C58) in the received command analysis process described above. In the jackpot command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the MODE corresponds to a fanfare command including information related to the start of the special gaming state (step C201). If it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the fanfare command (step C201; Y), the fanfare effect setting process (step C202) is performed to determine whether the prefetch effect is being executed (step C201). C209).

If the pre-reading effect is not being executed (step C209; N), the big hit command processing is terminated.
If the pre-reading effect is being executed (step C209; Y), the pre-reading effect executing flag is cleared (step C210). As a result, the pre-reading effect being executed ends. Then, a pre-reading effect re-lottery flag for enabling the pre-reading effect to be reset after the special gaming state is set (step C211), and the big hit command processing is ended. That is, if the pre-reading effect is executed at the start of the special gaming state, this is ended, and can be reset after the special gaming state is ended.
It should be noted that when a big hit occurs, information about the hold that is the target of the pre-reading effect is stored. Then, for example, the execution probability and content of the pre-reading effect may be changed depending on whether or not the book is on hold at the time of resetting.

  If it is determined in step C201 that MODE does not correspond to the fanfare command (step C201; N), it is determined whether MODE corresponds to the round command (step C203). If it is determined that the MODE corresponds to a round command including information on the number of rounds in the special gaming state (step C203; Y), a round effect setting process (step C204) is performed, and the process proceeds to step C209. Transition.

  If it is determined in step C203 that MODE does not correspond to a round command (step C203; N), whether MODE corresponds to an interval command including information on an interval between rounds or not. Is determined (step C205). If it is determined that MODE corresponds to the interval command (step C205; Y), an interval effect setting process (step C206) is performed, and the process proceeds to step C209.

If it is determined in step C205 that MODE does not correspond to an interval command (step C205; N), whether MODE corresponds to an ending command including information related to the end of the special gaming state. Is determined (step C207). If it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the ending command (step C207; Y), an ending effect setting process (step C208) is performed, and the process proceeds to step C209.
If it is determined that MODE does not correspond to an ending command (step C207; N), the jackpot command processing is terminated.

[Variation production setting processing]
Also, the changing effect setting process shown in FIG. 84 is performed instead of the changing effect setting process shown in FIG. In this variation effect setting process, instead of the prefetch effect promotion determination process (step C149), a prefetch effect resetting process (step C221) for resetting the prefetch effect after completion of the special game state is performed.

[Pre-reading effect reset processing]
FIG. 85 shows the prefetch effect resetting process (step C221) in the above-described variation effect setting process. The processes from step C171 to C182 in the prefetch effect resetting process are the same as the prefetch effect promotion determination process shown in FIG.
If the pre-reading effect is not being executed (step C171; N), it is determined whether there is a pre-reading effect re-lottery flag (step C231). The effect resetting process is terminated.

Further, when there is a pre-reading effect re-lottery flag (step C231; Y), the pre-reading effect re-lottery flag is cleared (step C232), and the hold 1 of FIG. (Suspend) is set (step C233), and a prefetch lottery process (step C234) is performed. Although details will be described later, the prefetch lottery process performs the process shown in FIG. 86 in place of the process shown in FIG.
When no pre-reading notice effect is generated (step C235; N), that is, when no pre-notification is selected in the pre-reading lottery process, it is determined whether the pre-reading lottery has been performed for all special figure 1 suspensions (step C239). ).

When a prefetching notice effect is generated (step C235; Y), that is, when execution and type of prefetching effect are selected in the prefetch lottery process, a scenario layer number corresponding to the selected prefetch effect is prepared (step C236), the address of the scenario data table corresponding to the selected prefetching effect is prepared (step C237). Thereafter, scenario data setting processing is performed (step C238), and it is determined whether or not prefetch lottery has been performed for all the special figure 1 suspensions (step C239).
Here, only the pending change notice is given as a pre-read notice notice effect that can be generated by re-lottery, so the scenario is set immediately.

When the prefetch lottery is performed for all the special figure 1 holds (step C239; Y), the prefetch effect resetting process is terminated.
Further, when the pre-read lottery is not performed for all the special figure 1 reservations (step C239; N), the special figure 1 reservation information after the digestion order is set (step C240), and the process returns to step 234. . That is, the pre-read lottery is sequentially performed for new holdings.

[Pre-fetch lottery processing]
Further, a prefetch lottery process shown in FIG. 86 is performed instead of the prefetch lottery process shown in FIG. In this pre-read lottery process, steps C251 to C255, which are processes related to the pre-draw effect re-lottery, are added. As processing related to the pre-drawing effect re-lottery, first, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading effect is re-lottery (step C251).

If it is not the re-lottery of the pre-read lottery (step C251; N), that is, if it is the pre-read lottery process in the pre-reading fluctuating command process associated with the occurrence of the start memory, the process proceeds to step C115.
Further, when the pre-read lottery is a re-lottery (step C251; Y), that is, the pre-read lottery process in the pre-read effect re-setting process associated with the start of the special figure change display game after the end of the special game state, The pre-read symbol command of the hold information set in the pre-read effect re-setting process is loaded (step C252).

The pre-read symbol command for the special figure 1 hold generated before the occurrence of the special game state is saved in the corresponding special figure 1 pre-read symbol command area, and this information is loaded here.
This prefetch symbol command is transmitted to and stored in the production control device 300 before the pre-reading for the special figure 1 suspension is prohibited, that is, before the big hit occurs.

Then, it is determined whether the target hold is a big hit only at a high probability (step C253).
If the target hold is not a big hit only at a high probability (step C253; N), a prefetch re-lottery group table corresponding to the prefetch symbol command is prepared (step C255), and the process proceeds to step C120.
If the target hold is a big hit only at a high probability (step C253; Y), the loaded pre-read symbol command is replaced with out-of-order information (out of both low-probability state and high-probability state) (step S253). C254), a prefetch re-lottery group table corresponding to the prefetch symbol command is prepared (step C255), and the process proceeds to step C120. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the production from being inconsistent due to the change in the probability state, thereby reducing the player's expectation and interest, and improving the interest of the game.

  In the pre-read re-lottery group table, there are defined types of pre-read effects that can be executed without prior notice and executable, and respective selection probabilities. Here, only a pending change notice that is performed by changing the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display is defined as an executable prefetch effect.

  That is, the effect control device 300 may make a re-determination regarding the advance notice effect based on the advance determination result information stored and held in the effect information storage and holding means (the effect control device 300) after the special gaming state ends. Make possible advance notice re-determination means.

FIG. 87 shows an example of a pre-reading effect execution mode. As shown in FIG. 87 (a), decorative special figure start memory displays 81 and 82 are displayed at the bottom of the display device 41.
The decorative special figure start memory display includes a first decorative special figure start memory display 81 corresponding to the special figure 1 hold and a second decorative special figure start memory display 82 corresponding to the special figure 2 hold. The first decorative special figure start memory display 81 is displayed on the right side, and the second decorative special figure start memory display 82 is displayed on the right side of the center.
The first ornament special figure start memory display 81 and the second ornament special figure start memory display 82 are such that one display corresponds to one start memory and the center side corresponds to the oldest start memory. The display corresponding to the new start-up memory is made in order toward the side.
Also, when the start memory is consumed, the corresponding decorative special figure start memory display is erased and sequentially shifts to the center side.

In the state shown in FIG. 87 (a), there are three special figure 1 reservations and zero special figure 2 reservations.
When the variable display based on the special figure 1 suspension is started from this state, the corresponding first decorative special figure start memory display 81 on the central side is erased as shown in FIG. Shift one by one.
Thereafter, when a new special figure 1 hold occurs as shown in FIG. 87 (c), a first decorative special figure start memory display 81 corresponding to the start memory is displayed. This special figure 1 hold is a big hit only in a high probability state, but here it is not a big hit because it is a low probability state (normal mode). With regard to this special figure 1 hold, since it was selected to perform the pre-reading effect by lottery, the pre-reading effect that changes the corresponding first decorative special figure start memory display 81 is performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 87 (d), the special figure 2 hold is newly generated and the second decorative special figure start storage display 82 is displayed. This special figure 2 hold is a big hit in the low probability state and the high probability state, and a pre-reading effect is performed to change the corresponding second decorative special figure start memory display 82.
Furthermore, a new special figure 1 hold is generated and the first decorative special figure start memory display 81 corresponding to the start memory is displayed, and the special figure fluctuation display game is finished as shown in FIG. 87 (e). The result mode is also displayed in the special figure variation display game. In addition, about the 1st decoration special figure start memory display 81 corresponding to this special figure 1 reservation, the pre-reading effect is performed in the 1st decoration special figure start memory display 81 corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation digested before this. Therefore, the pre-reading effect is not performed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 87 (f), the special figure variation display game based on the special figure 2 hold which is digested with priority over the special figure 1 hold is started, and the corresponding second decorative special figure start memory display 82 is displayed. Erased. Here, as an effect at the start of fluctuation, a sound indicating that there is a high possibility of a big hit is output.
As shown in FIG. 87 (g), the special figure variation display game is a big hit, and as shown in FIG. 87 (h), a special game state is set. With the start of the special gaming state, the display of the decoration special figure start memory display is erased, and the pre-reading effect ends. Note that the pre-reading effect information being executed is stored in the effect control device 300.
Then, as shown in FIG. 87 (i), it is notified that the pre-reading effect is reset at the end of the special gaming state, and the resetting is performed with the start of the special figure variation display game.

  Thereby, as shown in FIG. 87 (j), the pre-reading effect for the special figure 1 suspension is performed. Here, execution of the pre-reading effect is set for the first to third special figure 1 suspensions in the digestion order. The first to third special figure 1 hold in this digestion order is the special figure 1 hold that was second to fourth in the digestion order when the special gaming state occurs.

For these special figure 1 suspensions, the pre-reading effect is reset based on the information stored in the effect control device 300.
However, the hold that is a big hit only in a high probability state is treated as a loss. Here, the second special figure 1 hold in the digestion order is a hold that is a big hit only in a high probability state.
By resetting the pre-reading effect, the first and third special figure 1 reservations in the digestion order are changed from the state of no pre-reading effect to the state of executing the pre-reading effect.
In addition, the second special figure 1 suspension in the digestion order is set to the same prefetch effect (no change) as the prefetch effect that was being executed. For the second special figure 1 suspension in this digestion order, the pre-reading effect is reset as a loss. In this resetting of the hold, it was possible to select to change to another hold change notice or not to make the hold change notice, but here, no change in production was selected. In addition, since it is treated as an outage, an effect that definitely notifies at least the big hit is not selected.

Since the special figure 1 hold that was first in the digest order when the special gaming state occurs is digested with the start of the special figure variation display game, the corresponding first decorative special figure start memory display is displayed. Absent.
In addition, during the execution of the special figure variation display game, a special figure 1 hold is newly generated and the corresponding first decoration special figure start memory display is displayed, but a time-short state occurs when the special game state ends. Therefore, pre-reading information is not transmitted for this special figure 1 suspension, and pre-reading effects are not performed.

As described above, the advance notice effect regarding the hold generated before the occurrence of the special game state can be performed even after the special game state is finished, so that the interest of the game can be improved.
Further, by treating the suspension that is a big hit only in a high probability state as being out of place, it is possible to prevent an excessive sense of expectation and to maintain the fairness of the game. In addition, it is possible to prevent a contradiction in the production due to the change in the probability state and to reduce the player's expectation and interest, and to improve the interest of the game.

In other words, if the pre-reading effect is reset in a state where the special gaming state is finished and the state is in a high probability state, a hold that becomes a big hit only in a high probability state is a hold that becomes a big hit in this state, so There is a high possibility that a high prefetching effect will be set. However, as the special gaming state is ended, the time is shortened, so that the special figure 1 suspension is likely to be stored without being digested. If a prefetch effect with a high degree of expectation is performed for such special figure 1 hold, the player will have an excessive sense of expectation.
Also, even if the special probability variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times and the high probability state and the short-time state are ended and the special figure 1 suspension is completed, the result will be lost at that time. Will give a great sense of disappointment and will reduce interest.
Furthermore, by stopping in the high probability state, it is possible to digest the special figure 1 hold and generate a big hit, so that a player who has done such a thing and a player who has not done so Profits obtained may vary greatly, and there is a risk that fairness among players may be impaired.
However, since it is a prefetch effect that is set for a hold that becomes a loss by treating the hold that becomes a big hit only in a high probability state, the lookahead effect that is not expected to be so high is not performed. Such a problem can be prevented from occurring.

  Based on the above, the variable display device (display device 41) that displays a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning port (start winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37). ), Main control means (game control apparatus 100) for overall control of the game, and effect control means (effect control apparatus 300) for effect control related to the variable display game based on control information from the main control means In a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state that gives a player a predetermined game value when the result of the variable display game is a special result, There is a probability state and a high probability state higher than the normal probability state, and a high probability state can be generated after the special gaming state is finished, and the start winning opening is a first start winning opening (start winning opening) 36) and A second start winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) that is convertible between a winning possible state and a non-winning state, and the main control means is based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening, A first start storage means (game control device 100) for storing a right to execute the variable display game as a first start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number, and storing a predetermined random number corresponding to the start memory; Based on the winning of the game ball at the second start winning opening, the right to execute the variable display game can be stored up to a predetermined upper limit number as the second start memory, and a predetermined random number is stored corresponding to the start memory The second start storage means (game control device 100), the first start storage means, and the predetermined random numbers stored in the second start storage means are used before the variable display game based on the start storage is executed. Judgment possible Predetermining means (game control device 100), priority control means (game control device 100) for executing the variable display game based on the second start memory in preference to the variable display game based on the first start memory, main control Control information transmitting means (game control device 100) for transmitting the control information in the means to the effect control means, and the control information transmitting means has a probability state that brings the prior determination result by the prior determination means into the prior determination result. It is configured to be able to be transmitted to the effect control means as prior determination result information including identifiable information, and the effect control means is based on the prior determination result information transmitted by the control information transmitting means. Based on the determination result of the advance notice effect determining means (effect control device 300) capable of making a determination on the advance notice effect determining means, the advance notice is determined. Advance notice effect execution means (effect control device 300) capable of executing a notification effect and effect information storage / holding means (effect control device 300) capable of storing and holding the prior determination result information transmitted by the control information transmitting means. And prior notice effect redetermining means (effect control device) capable of performing redetermination regarding the prior notice effect based on the advance determination result information stored and held in the effect information storage holding means after the end of the special gaming state. 300), and the advance notice effect executing means can regulate the advance notice effect executed by the advance notice effect executing means when the special game state occurs, and after the special game state ends. The prior notice effect can be executed based on the determination result of the prior notice effect redetermining means.

  Therefore, since the advance notice effect about the start memory that occurred before the occurrence of the special game state can be performed, the interest of the game can be improved.

  The prior notice effect redetermining means (effect control apparatus 300) performs redetermination regarding the prior notice effect based on the advance determination result information stored and held in the effect information storage and holding means (effect control apparatus 300). In the case where the prior determination result information is information indicating that the special gaming state occurs only in the high probability state, the special determination state information indicates whether the special gaming state is in the normal probability state or the high probability state. It is possible to replace the information indicating that it does not occur and perform re-determination.

  Therefore, it is possible to prevent a contradiction in the production due to a change in the probability state and to reduce the player's expectation and interest, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the first special figure fluctuation display game after the end of the special gaming state, a notification effect for notifying the result of resetting the prefetch effect as shown in FIG. 88 may be performed.
As shown in FIG. 88 (a), at the start of the special figure variation display game, the first decorative special figure start memory display 81 is not displayed, and the result of resetting the pre-reading effect is notified to the center of the display device 41. The re-lottery box 84 is displayed.
It should be noted that the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed in a vacant display area (here, the upper right portion) of the display device 41. Further, the second decorative special figure start memory display 82 is displayed from the beginning.

As shown in FIG. 88 (a), the first decorative special figure start memory display 81 corresponding to the special figure 1 suspension which is first in the digestion order is displayed so as to jump out of the re-lottery box 84. At this time, the first decorative special figure start memory display 81 is in a state where the pre-reading effect has already been reset.
Then, the first decoration special figure start memory display 81 that has popped out is displayed for a predetermined period on the temporary display unit 85 on the side of the re-lottery box 84, and is then displayed at a normal display position located below the display device 41. Moving.
Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 88 (b), the first decoration special figure start memory display 81 corresponding to the special figure 1 hold which is second in the digestion order is also displayed in the same manner, and as shown in FIG. 88 (c) The first decorative special figure start memory display 81 corresponding to the third special figure 1 hold in order is also displayed.
Through such a notification effect, as shown in FIG. 88 (d), all the first decorative special figure start memory displays 81 are displayed.

The special figure 1 suspension generated after the end of the special gaming state is not subject to resetting, so it may be displayed without a notification effect, or a notification effect indicating that there is no pre-reading effect. May be.
Alternatively, the pre-reading effect may be reset during the special game state, and the result notification may be performed during the special game state. In this way, it is possible to reset the special figure 1 suspension which is first in the digestion order when the special gaming state occurs.
In addition, a digestion hold display area 83 as shown in FIG. 82 may be provided, and a pre-reading effect reset in the digest hold display area 83 may be displayed. In this way, it is possible to display the pre-reading effect that is reset during execution of the special figure variation display game for the special figure 1 suspension that is first in the digestion order when the special gaming state occurs.

Further, in order to perform such a notification effect, a variation pattern having a sufficient variation time to perform the notification effect is set for the first game after the end of the special gaming state.
The fluctuation time at this time may be a time at which a notification effect can be performed for a maximum of three special figure 1 holds when the special effect 1 hold generated in the game is not performed. It is possible to always set a variable time during which a notification effect can be performed for three special figure 1 holds, or to set a necessary variable time according to the number of special figure 1 hold to be reset. good.

In addition, when the first game after the end of the special gaming state is based on the special figure 2 hold, the notification effect may or may not be performed.
That is, the case where the first game after the end of the special gaming state is based on the special figure 1 hold is a case where it is a big hit (first hit) when the state is not the short-time state. It is preferable for the player to perform a notification effect preferably by setting a long fluctuation time also in terms of earning time until the hold is accumulated.
On the other hand, the case where the first game after the end of the special game state is based on the special figure 2 hold is mainly a case of a big hit (continuous hit) in the short-time state. Since it may be preferable for the player not to set a long fluctuation time to advance the notification, the notification effect may not be performed.

In addition, the pre-reading variation combination confirmation process (step C116) prevents a big hit or a highly reliable reach production from being held as a notice target, but this makes it possible to obtain a notice before the notice subject as a hold. Even if the pre-reading effect is reset for the hold, the expectation of the hold may not be increased.
For this reason, it is preferable to perform a certain degree of hold change notice for the hold before the hold to be notified. In addition, a hold change notice may be made for an existing hold when a hold that becomes a big hit only in a high probability state occurs.

In addition, the pre-reading effect to be reset is only the pending change notice, but the notice is given by the effect that continuously generates a specific effect or reach state over a plurality of special figure change display games, or the character that appears during the change display. A prefetch effect such as an effect to be performed may be selectable.
Further, a sub display device that displays information related to the game may be provided separately from the display device 41, and the pre-reading effect display may be performed on the sub display device. For example, the notification effect shown in FIG. 88 or the like may be performed on the sub display device after the special game state is ended, regardless of the special figure variation display game.

[Second Modification]
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly different portions. explain. The gaming machine of this modification can reset the pre-reading effect with the transition from the high probability state to the low probability state.

[Variation production setting processing]
In the gaming machine of the present modification, the variation effect setting process shown in FIG. 89 is performed instead of the variation effect setting process shown in FIG. In this variation effect setting process, it is determined whether it is the first rotation after the end of ST (step C261). The end of ST means that a specified number of special figure change display games are executed and the high probability state ends and the low probability state ends. Here, is the first special figure change display game in the low probability state? Is judged.

If it is not the first rotation after the end of ST (step C261; N), the processing after step C142 is performed. Here, the pre-reading effect promotion determination process (step C149) is not performed.
If it is the first rotation after the end of ST (step C261; Y), it is determined whether or not there is a special figure hold other than the change (step C262). If there is no special figure hold other than the change (step C262) C262; N) performs the processing after step C142.

When there is a special figure hold other than the fluctuation (step C262; Y), a notice distribution table 1 for hold prefetch notice digestion effect is prepared (step C263), and it is determined whether there is a big hit hold only at a high probability. (Step C264).
And when there is no big hit hold only at the high probability (step C264; N), a notice lottery process is performed (step C266), and the process after step C150 is performed.
Also, when there is a big hit hold only at a high probability (step C264; Y), the notice allocation table 2 for the hold prefetch notice digestion effect is prepared (step C265). As a result, it is possible to make a specific change in the pre-reading effect for the hold that has not been a big hit by shifting to the low probability state.

Examples of this unique change include a change to a prefetch effect that does not normally appear and an end (regulation) of the prefetch effect. In particular, if the pre-reading effect is ended, it is possible to prevent a contradiction in the effect due to a change in the probability state, thereby reducing a player's expectation and interest, and to improve the interest of the game.
After that, using the prepared notice allocation table, a notice lottery process for drawing the start, end, and change of the pre-reading effect for each hold is performed (step C266), and the processes after step C150 are performed.

By this process, the pre-reading effect about the hold stored when the low probability state is entered is reset to change the presence / absence of execution and the contents, and information about each hold is suggested and notified.
For example, for a hold where the pre-reading effect is not executed in the high probability state, the pre-reading effect is executed rather than the hold where the hold that becomes a big hit (the hold that becomes a big hit in either the low probability state or the high probability state) is out of place. The probability of being hit is increased, and this suggests and notifies the possibility of a big hit.
In addition, for a hold where a pre-reading effect is being executed in a high probability state, a hold with a big hit (a hold with a big win in either a low probability state or a high probability state) is more reliable than a hold with a loss. The change to a high prefetching effect and the probability that the prefetching effect will not end are increased, and this also suggests and notifies the possibility of a big hit.

In addition, for a hold that becomes a big hit only in a high probability state, a specific advance notice effect that is a pre-reading effect for definite notification of the big hit is regulated from the beginning, but there is a possibility that some pre-reading effect is performed high.
By performing a specific change (for example, a change to a pre-reading effect that does not normally appear or an end (regulation) of the pre-reading effect) with respect to the hold, the hold is a hold that becomes a big hit only in a high probability state. It can also be suggested.
Furthermore, it is suggested that the hold becomes a big hit by making another specific change (for example, a change to a pre-reading effect that does not normally appear) for the hold that becomes a big hit in both the low probability state and the high probability state. You can also.
In addition, with respect to a hold that becomes a big hit in either the low probability state or the high probability state, the prefetch effect is temporarily finished and then restored so that the expectation can be expected even when the prefetch effect is finished by resetting. good.

  It should be noted that such pre-reading effect resetting is performed in the first special figure variation display game in a low probability state, but it may be performed at a timing other than this. For example, it may be performed in the final special map fluctuation display game in a high probability state. In this case, it may be performed while the special figure variation display game is varying, or may be performed during the stop time (such as during the end notification of the ST state). When it is performed during the stop time, the stop time may be extended more than usual.

In addition, when a pre-reading effect is made for a big hit only in a high-probability state, if there is another hold that is digested before a big-stake hold only in the high-probability state, the pre-reading effect is immediately applied. Instead of annihilating, it is also possible to perform an effect in which the pre-reading effect disappears up to the special figure variation display game based on the hold that is a big hit only in the high probability state.
Furthermore, if the same effect is performed when a pre-reading effect is performed for a hold that becomes a big hit in both the low probability state and the high probability state, and finally it is performed as an effect that the pre-reading effect does not disappear, It is possible to give a sense of expectation as to whether or not the pre-reading effect disappears in the effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when a pre-reading effect is made during a low-probability state and a high-probability state, and the pre-reading effect is performed, the high-probability state production mode is continued and the ST state is a big-hit. You may make it look like this.
On the other hand, if the transition to the low-probability state is made during the pre-reading effect for the big-stake hold only in the high-probability state, it will eventually be lost, but the production mode in the high-probability state will continue to be expected. You may make it have a feeling.

  In the conventional gaming machine, the prefetching is prevented from being contradicted by restricting the prefetching from a predetermined number of games before the timing at which the probability state changes such as the end of ST, but the gaming machine of this embodiment also takes the probability state into account. As a result of the prefetching, the prefetching effect as described above can be performed in accordance with the changing probability state.

Further, a sub display device that displays information related to the game may be provided separately from the display device 41, and the pre-reading effect display may be performed on the sub display device.
For example, after the end of the special gaming state, an effect relating to the resetting of the prefetch effect may be performed on the sub display device regardless of the special figure changing display game.
Further, in the low probability state, the decorative special figure start memory display 81 and 82 corresponding to the sub display device is displayed, and in the high probability state, the decorative special figure start memory display 81 and 82 corresponding to the display device 41 is displayed. Also good. In this manner, in the high-probability state, with respect to the hold in which the special figure variation display game is performed after the high-probability state ends, a pre-reading effect such as a hold change notice is performed on the sub-display device. It is possible to prevent the effects related to the end of the high probability state from being disturbed, and it is possible to reliably perform the pre-reading effect for the hold that is digested after the end of the high probability state, thereby improving the interest of the game. .

  Based on the above, the variable display device (display device 41) that displays a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning port (start winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37). ), Main control means (game control apparatus 100) for overall control of the game, and effect control means (effect control apparatus 300) for effect control related to the variable display game based on control information from the main control means In a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state that gives a player a predetermined game value when the result of the variable display game is a special result, There are a probability state and a high probability state higher than the normal probability state, and after the special gaming state, the variable display game in the high probability state can be executed over a predetermined period, and the main control The stage can store up to a predetermined upper limit number of right to execute the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball at the start winning opening as a start memory, and stores a predetermined random number corresponding to the start memory A start storage means (game control device 100) and a pre-determining means (game) capable of determining a predetermined random number stored in the start storage means before the variable display game based on the start storage is executed. Control device 100), and control information transmission means (game control device 100) for transmitting control information in the main control means to the effect control means. The control information transmission means It is configured so that it can be transmitted to the effect control means as pre-determination result information including information that can identify the probability state at the time of determination. The effect control means is controlled by the control information transmitting means. Based on the transmitted prior determination result information, a prior notice effect unit (effect control device 300) capable of executing an advance notice effect is provided, and the prior notice effect means is a prior notice relating to a variable display game executed after the end of the specific gaming state. When the determination result information is information indicating that the special gaming state is generated only in the high probability state, and the preliminary announcement effect is executed based on the preliminary determination result information, the preliminary announcement effect is performed at a predetermined timing. Can be changed.

  Therefore, it is possible to prevent a contradiction in the production due to a change in the probability state and to reduce the player's expectation and interest, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Third Modification]
Next, a third modification of the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly different portions. explain. The gaming machine of this modification can also restore the pre-reading effect when recovering from a power failure.

In the gaming machine of this modification, power is also supplied from the backup power supply unit 420 to the main control microcomputer 311 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the effect control device 300, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is shut off. It has come to be.
As a result, both the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 are backed up when a power failure occurs, and data is held.

The information backed up by the effect control device 300 includes at least information related to start memory such as the number of start memories and prefetch information, information related to prefetch effects such as the fact that the prefetch effect is being executed and the contents of the effect, and the like. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the prefetching effect is resumed based on the information.
That is, when the power failure occurs in the gaming machine, the performance control information that can store and retain the performance control information related to the performance control at the time of the power outage including at least the prior determination result information even when the power failure occurs. It serves as a memory retention means.

[Single command processing]
FIG. 90 shows the single command processing (step C62) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this single-shot command processing, first, it is determined whether MODE corresponds to a model designation command including information related to a model set in the game control apparatus 100 (step C301). If it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the model designation command (step C301; Y), a model setting process (step C302) for setting to control the model according to the command is performed, System command processing ends.

  If it is determined in step C301 that MODE does not correspond to the model designation command (step C301; N), MODE corresponds to a RAM initialization command indicating that the RAM 111C has been initialized. Is determined (step C303). If it is determined that MODE corresponds to the RAM initialization command (step C303; Y), a RAM initialization setting process (step C304) for performing a process corresponding to the initialization of the RAM is performed. End single-shot command processing.

  If it is determined in step C303 that the MODE does not correspond to the RAM initialization command (step C303; N), the MODE returns a power failure recovery command indicating that the RAM 111C has been recovered from the power failure without initializing the RAM 111C. It is determined whether it corresponds (step C305). If it is determined that the MODE corresponds to a power failure recovery command (step C305; Y), a power failure recovery setting process (step C306) for performing a process at the time of power failure recovery is performed, and a single command processing is performed. finish.

  If it is determined in step C305 that MODE does not correspond to the power failure recovery command (step C305; N), it is determined whether MODE corresponds to the customer waiting demo command indicating the start of the customer waiting demo. (Step C307). If it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the customer waiting demo command (step C307; Y), a customer waiting demo setting process (step C308) for starting the customer waiting demo is performed, System command processing ends.

  If it is determined in step C307 that MODE does not correspond to the customer waiting demo command (step C307; N), MODE corresponds to special figure 1 suspension transmitted when special figure 1 suspension occurs. It is determined whether it corresponds to the decoration special figure hold number command to be performed (step C309). When it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold (step C309; Y), the special figure 1 hold for performing the processing related to the generated special figure 1 hold is performed. An information setting process (step C310) is performed, and the single command processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C309 that MODE does not correspond to the decoration special figure hold count command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold (step C309; N), the MODE is accompanied by the special figure 2 hold. It is determined whether it corresponds to the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold transmitted (step C311). If it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold (step C311; Y), the special figure 2 hold for performing processing related to the generated special figure 2 hold is performed. An information setting process (step C312) is performed, and the single command processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C311 that MODE does not correspond to the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold (step C311; N), MODE is a probability information command including lottery probability information. It is determined whether it corresponds (step C313). When it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the probability information command (step C313; Y), a probability information setting process (step C314) for performing a process corresponding to the set probability is performed, and the single-shot system is performed. Terminates command processing.

  If it is determined in step C313 that MODE does not correspond to the probability information command (step C313; N), it is determined whether MODE corresponds to a command relating to an error or fraud (step C315). If it is determined that MODE corresponds to a command related to an error or fraud (step C315; Y), an error / illegal setting process (step C316) for performing processing corresponding to the command is performed, and a single-shot system is performed. Terminates command processing.

  If it is determined in step C315 that MODE does not correspond to a command related to error or fraud (step C315; N), it is determined whether MODE corresponds to a command including information related to switching of the rendering mode. (Step C317). If it is determined that the MODE corresponds to a command including information related to the switching of the effect mode (step C317; Y), an effect mode switching setting process (step C317) for performing a process of switching to the effect mode corresponding to the command. C318) is performed, and the single-shot command processing is terminated.

  In Step C317, when it is determined that MODE does not correspond to the command related to the switching of the effect mode (Step C317; N), it is determined whether MODE corresponds to the command including information related to the change stop. (Step C319). If it is determined that the MODE does not correspond to a command including information regarding suspension of fluctuation (step C319; N), the single command processing is terminated.

  If it is determined that MODE corresponds to a command including information related to the stop of fluctuation (step C319; Y), it is determined whether the command is a normal command (step C320). If the command is not normal (step C320; N), the single command processing is terminated. If the command is normal (step C320; Y), the corresponding special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is set to stop (step C321). If all symbols are stopped, the game state flag is set to normal. The state is set (step C322), and the single command processing is terminated.

[Power failure recovery setting processing]
FIG. 91 shows the power failure recovery setting process (step C306) in the single-shot command process described above. In the power failure recovery setting process, first, it is determined whether the received command is a normal command (step C331). Here, for example, it is determined whether the command is a normal command by checking whether MODE and ACT are a correct combination.
When the received command is not a normal command (step C331; N), the power failure recovery setting process is terminated. If the received command is a normal command (step C331; Y), an initial value is set in the RAM area where the initial value is set (step C332). Thereby, the error state and the like are once cleared. If the error continues, an error state is set again after this.

Then, display setting of the recovery screen to be displayed on the display device 41 at the time of power failure recovery (step C333), LED setting at the time of recovery such as blinking LED at the time of power failure recovery (step C334), It is determined whether the information and the number of internal memory holds match (step C335).
The power failure recovery command includes at least information on the number of holds among the game control information backed up by the game control information storage and holding means (game control device 100). Here, this information is backed up by the effect control device 300. It is determined whether or not it matches the information on the number of pending holds.

If the received information on the number of holds does not match the number of holds in the internal memory (step C335; N), the information related to the execution of the prefetch effect is cleared (step C340), and the power failure recovery setting process is terminated. In this case, since the backed up information does not match, there is a possibility that a contradiction occurs when the prefetching effect is resumed, so the prefetching effect is not resumed.
When the received information on the number of holds matches the number of holds in the internal memory (step C335; Y), it is determined whether the number of holds is 0 (step C336).

When the number of holds is 0 (step C336; Y), information related to execution of the prefetch effect is cleared (step C340), and the power failure recovery setting process is terminated. In this case, there is no pre-reading effect.
If the number of holds is not 0 (step C336; N), it is determined whether the pre-reading effect was being executed before the power failure (step C337).

If the pre-reading effect is not being executed before the power failure (step C337; N), the information related to the execution of the pre-reading effect is cleared (step C340), and the power failure recovery setting process is terminated. In this case, there is no pre-reading effect to resume.
Further, when the pre-reading effect is being executed before the power failure (step C337; Y), it is determined whether the hold that is the hold intended for the pre-reading effect is a big hit (step C338).

If this hold is not a big hit (step C338; N), information related to execution of the prefetch effect is cleared (step C340), and the power failure recovery setting process is terminated.
Further, when this reservation is a big hit (step C338; Y), a process for displaying and restoring the prefetch effect is performed (step C339), and the power failure recovery setting process is terminated.
In the process of restoring the display of the pre-reading effect (step C339), the process of resuming the pre-reading effect is performed based on the information backed up by the effect control information storage and holding unit (effect control device 300).

In other words, when the number of holds is not 0 and the number of holds backed up by the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 match, a pre-reading effect is performed for a hold that becomes a big hit before a power failure. In such a case, the prefetching effect is resumed.
Thereby, the production state before the occurrence of a power failure can be restored, and the entertainment of the game can be enhanced. In addition, since the pre-reading effect is resumed only when the notice target is a big hit, it can be clearly notified that the big hit will be caused by the resumption, and the interest at the time of power failure restoration can be enhanced.
In particular, since it is a condition for resumption that the number of suspensions backed up by the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 match, it has been confirmed that there is no problem even if the effect state before the occurrence of a power failure is restored. The production can be revived and the inconsistency of production can be prevented.

In determining whether or not the main hold is a big hit (step C338), the big hit hold may be only the big hit hold in the low probability state and the high probability state, or the probability state is the high probability state. In this case, it is possible to include a hold that becomes a big hit only in a high probability state.
Further, the pre-reading effect that is not intended for the big hit hold may be resumed without performing the process of step C338.
Further, when the prefetching effect is resumed, the prefetching effect may be reset as in the above-described second modification.
Further, a sub display device that displays information related to the game may be provided separately from the display device 41, and the prefetch effect display to be resumed may be performed on the sub display device.

Further, the prefetching effect to be resumed may be only the pending change notice. In this case, it may be possible to resume only when the pending change notice has been made before the occurrence of the power failure, or the prefetch effect that is not the pending change notice that was performed before the occurrence of the power failure may be resumed as the pending change notice. .
In addition, the prefetching effect may be restarted only when the prefetching effect of specific contents is performed. For example, as a pre-reading effect, the same jackpot finalizing effect may be restarted again when the power failure is restored only when the jackpot finalizing notification for notifying the big hit is performed.
In this case, if the confirmation sound is output as the big hit confirmation notification before the power failure occurs, the same big hit confirmation notification as before the occurrence of the power failure may be resumed so that the confirmation sound is output again when the power failure is restored. Alternatively, although a confirmation sound is output as a jackpot confirmation notification before the occurrence of a power failure, a jackpot confirmation notification different from that before the occurrence of a power failure may be performed so that a jackpot confirmation notification is made by a pending change notice when the power failure is restored.

  Based on the above, the variable display device (display device 41) that displays a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning port (start winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37). ), Main control means (game control apparatus 100) for overall control of the game, and effect control means (effect control apparatus 300) for effect control related to the variable display game based on control information from the main control means And when the result of the variable display game is a special result, the game machine can generate a special game state that gives a predetermined game value to the player, and the main control means Based on the winning of the game ball, the start storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing the right to execute the variable display game as a start storage up to a predetermined upper limit number, and the start storage stored in the start storage means Preliminary determination means (game control device 100) that can be determined before the variable display game based on the start memory is executed, and at least preliminary determination result information that is information of a determination result by the preliminary determination means Control information transmission means (game control device 100) for transmitting control information in the main control means to the effect control means, and when a power failure occurs in the gaming machine, game control information related to game control at the time of the power failure occurs Game control information storage and holding means (game control device 100) that can be stored and held inside, the effect control means executes the advance notice effect based on the prior determination result information transmitted by the control information transmission means When a power failure occurs in a possible prior notice production means (production control device 300) and the gaming machine, a power failure occurrence including at least prior determination result information Effect control information storage and holding means (effect control device 300) capable of storing and holding the effect control information related to the effect control at the time even during the power failure, and the main control means controls the game when the power is restored from the power failure. The game control information at the time of the occurrence of a power failure that is stored and held in the information storage and holding means is transmitted to the effect control means, and the effect control means is based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established when the power supply is restored from the power failure. Thus, the effect control corresponding to the effect control information at the time of the occurrence of the power failure stored and retained in the effect control information memory retaining means can be executed.

  Therefore, the production state before the occurrence of a power failure can be restored, and the fun of the game can be enhanced.

  The game control information stored and held in the game control information storage and holding means (game control apparatus 100) includes the number of start memories stored in the start storage means (game control apparatus 100), and the effect control information. The effect control information stored and held in the memory holding means (effect game control device 300) includes the number of start memories transmitted by the control information transmission means (game control device 100), and the predetermined condition is control information transmission The number of start memories stored in the start storage means in the game control information transmitted by the means coincides with the number of start memories in the effect control information stored in the effect control information storage holding means. Is to do.

  Therefore, the production can be restored after confirming that no trouble occurs even if the production state before the occurrence of the power failure is restored, and it is possible to prevent inconsistencies in the production.

  Further, the predetermined condition is that information indicating that a special gaming state occurs is included in the advance determination result information stored and held in the effect control information storage and holding means (effect control device 300). Therefore, the player's expectation can be enhanced and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, the production control means (production control device 300) performs the start memory notification display for displaying the information related to the start memory by the start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display 81, 82) corresponding to each start memory. The notification means (effect control device 300) is provided, and the advance notice effect means (effect control device 300) can perform the advance notice effect on the corresponding start memory in the start memory notice display, and retain the effect control information storage. The effect control information stored and held in the means (effect control device 300) includes the advance notice information indicating that the advance notice effect means is performing the advance notice effect on the corresponding start memory in the start memory notification display, The predetermined condition is that notice information is stored in the production control information storage holding means.

  Therefore, it is possible to prevent the advance notice from being interrupted due to a power failure, and to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

[Fourth Modification]
Next, a fourth modification of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly different portions. explain. The gaming machine of this modification differs in gameability when it is a big hit.

As shown in FIG. 92, the gaming board of the gaming machine of the present modification includes a first round selection gate 91 that forms a specific area in which a game ball can pass in addition to the configuration of the gaming board 30 shown in FIG. A second round selection gate 92 is provided.
The first round selection gate 91 forming the second specific area is provided in the game area 32 located on the left side of the center case 40. The first round selection gate 91 is configured such that a game ball can pass up and down, and a first round selection gate switch 91a for detecting the passed game ball is provided.
Further, the second round selection gate 92 forming the first specific area is provided in the game area 32 located on the lower right side of the center case 40. The second round selection gate 92 is configured such that a game ball can pass up and down, and a second round selection gate switch 92a for detecting the passed game ball is provided.
The first round selection gate 91 can pass only the game ball flowing down the left side of the center case 40, and the second round selection gate 92 can pass only the game ball flowing down the right side of the center case 40. Therefore, the player can select which round selection gate to pass the game ball by adjusting the firing force.

When a predetermined big hit (predetermined special result mode) occurs, an auxiliary gaming state in which the detection of the game ball at the first round selection gate 91 and the second round selection gate 92 is effective is set.
Note that there is a big hit that is not a predetermined big hit, and in this case, the number of rounds is determined according to the type of the big hit, so no auxiliary gaming state occurs.

In the auxiliary game state, the player selects whether the game ball is allowed to pass through either the first round selection gate 91 or the second round selection gate 92 by adjusting the firing force of the game ball. The number of rounds in the special game state is selected according to the round selection gate through which the game ball has passed. That is, the number of rounds in the special game state can be selected according to the player's intention.
When a game ball is passed through the first round selection gate 91, 10 rounds (10R) are set as the number of rounds. When the game ball is passed through the second round selection gate 92, 4 rounds (4R) or 16 rounds (16R) are set by lottery. Then, the special game state of the number of rounds selected in the auxiliary game state is performed.

That is, based on the passing of the game ball to the second round selection gate 92 that forms the first specific area, the first game value 16R and the second game value that is given to the player is lower than the first game value. One of the game values 4R is selected by lottery.
Further, based on the passage of the game ball to the first round selection gate 91 forming the second specific area, the game value to be given to the player is lower than the first game value (16R) and the second game value (4R). 10R, which is the third game value higher than), is selected.
Thus, the interest can be enhanced by the process of determining the game value in the auxiliary gaming state, and various aspects are included in the determination process of the game value, so that the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

  FIG. 93 shows a block diagram of a control system in the gaming machine of this modification. In addition to the configuration shown in FIG. 3, the gaming machine of this modification includes a first round selection gate switch 91 a and a second round selection gate switch 92 a, which are connected to the proximity I / F 121. In the present modification, there is only one big prize opening switch 38a.

[Random number update process 1]
Further, the random number update processing 1 shown in FIG. 94 is performed in place of the random number update processing 1 shown in FIG. Since the small hit is not set in the gaming machine of this modification, the processes of steps S214 to S216 that are processes related to the small hit are not performed. In addition, the process regarding the small hit is not performed in other processes.
Further, in the gaming machine of the present modification, since there is only one type of hitting result for the normal symbol, the processes of steps S220 to S222 that are processes related to the random symbol for determining the hit symbol for the normal symbol are not performed. In other processes, the process of selecting the hit symbol of the ordinary figure is not performed.
Of course, it is possible to set a small hit, and it is possible to have a plurality of hits in the normal figure. In this case, the corresponding processing is performed.

Further, when a game ball is passed through the second round selection gate 92, processing for setting an initial value of a round lottery random number, which is a random number for lottery for lottery, is performed.
In this process, it is determined whether or not the round lottery random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S501). When waiting for the setting (step S501; Y), the round lottery initial is set as the next initial value. The random number is loaded (step S502), and the next initial value of the loaded round lottery random number is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number region) (step S503).

[Special Figure Game Processing]
Also, the special game process shown in FIG. 95 is performed in place of the special game process shown in FIG. In the special game process, steps A15 to A18, which are processes related to the small hit, are not performed.
Further, as processing related to the auxiliary gaming state, processing during fanfare 1 (step A231) and waiting for gate passage (step A232) are performed, and processing during fanfare2 / interval (step A223) is performed instead of processing during fanfare / interval (step A11). )I do.

  In step A7, if the special figure game process number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the fanfare command setting corresponding to the type of the big hit or the big win for each big hit Special chart display processing (step A10) is performed for setting fanfare time according to the mouth opening pattern, setting information necessary for performing fanfare 1 processing or fanfare 2 / interval processing, and the like.

In step A7, if the special figure game process number is “3”, the fanfare 1 in-process (step A231) for setting information necessary for performing the gate waiting process is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “4”, waiting for the gate passing, in which the number of rounds is set based on the game ball passing through the first round selection gate 91 or the second round selection gate 92 Processing (step A232) is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “5”, setting of the opening time of the big prize opening, updating of the number of times of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the processing during opening of the big prize opening, etc. are performed. Fanfare 2 / inter-interval processing (step A233) is performed.

  With the addition of the above-described processing, special figure game process numbers corresponding to the special winning opening open process (step A12), the special winning opening remaining ball process (step A13), and the big hit end process (step A14) are provided. The special game process number set corresponding to this in other processes is also changed.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Also, instead of the special figure start port switch common process shown in FIG. 24, the special figure start port switch common process shown in FIG. 96 is performed. In this special figure start port switch common process, the processes of steps A142 to A144 which are processes related to the small hit are not performed.
In addition, as a process corresponding to the case where the number of rounds is drawn before the start of the special gaming state, a round lottery random number for drawing the number of rounds is extracted (step A241), and the round lottery random number is stored in the round lottery random number storage area. A process of saving (step A242) is performed.
Since the round lottery random number is also extracted at the time of the occurrence of the hold as described above, the round lottery random number can be determined in advance, and information on the number of rounds can be suggested and notified by prefetching.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
Also, instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 36, a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 97 is performed. In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, the processes of steps A410 to A415, which are processes related to the small hit, are not performed.
Further, as a process corresponding to the case where the number of rounds is drawn in the auxiliary game state, when the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A401; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of rounds is determined to be stopped (step A401). A251).

  The jackpot stop symbol includes a stop symbol in which the number of rounds is determined (for example, 2R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit), and a stop symbol for determining the number of rounds using the first round selection gate 91 and the second round selection gate 92 ( 4R, 10R, or 16R, which is a big hit that is either a round selection type probability variation big hit or a round selection type normal big hit). If it is a stop symbol for determining the number of rounds (step A251; Y), round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A407). If the number of rounds is not a stop symbol (step A251; N), the number of rounds is not determined at this point, and the process of step A407 is not performed.

  Also, instead of the process of acquiring time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number and saving in the time reduction determination data area (step A408), the probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and the probability variation determination is performed. A process of saving in the data area (step A252) is performed. This is because, in this modification, it is more convenient to perform distribution according to whether or not a high probability state is set in distribution in the subsequent big hit end process.

Although illustration is omitted, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired only in the case of the special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. A process of saving in the upper limit information area (step A437) is performed.
Also, instead of the process of acquiring time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number and saving in the time reduction determination data area (step A438), probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and probability variation determination is performed. Saves data in the data area.

[Special figure display processing]
In addition, in place of the special figure display process shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the special figure display process shown in FIGS. 98 and 99 is performed. In this special figure display processing, steps A701, A702, A725 to A734, which are processing relating to small hits, are not performed.
Also, as a process corresponding to the case where the number of rounds is drawn in the auxiliary game state, when the big hit flag 1 or 2 is a big hit (step A705 or A706; Y), it is determined whether the round number is a big hit. Perform (Step A261).

If the round number is a big hit (step A261; Y), the processing of steps A709 to A711 for setting the number of rounds is performed. If the round number is not a big hit (step A261; N), the number of rounds has not been determined at this time, so the processes of steps A709 to A711 are not performed.
In addition, since the processing after the jackpot occurrence differs depending on whether or not the number of rounds is a big hit, it is set according to the stop symbol number (type of jackpot) instead of the processing for preparing the fanfare command (step A716). Processing for preparing a fanfare command corresponding to the special winning opening information (step A262) is performed.

  In addition, after performing the process of saving the fraud monitoring non-monitoring period flag in the winning prize fraud monitoring period flag area (step A723), as a process corresponding to the lottery of the number of rounds in the auxiliary gaming state, A jackpot start setting process (step A263) for performing a process such as setting of a game state involved is performed, and it is determined whether the round number is a big hit (step A264).

If it is not a big hit to determine the number of rounds (step A264; N), the fanfare 1 hour corresponding to the special game flag is saved in the special game process timer area (step A265), and the fanfare 1 mid-process transition setting process (step A266). ) To finish the special figure display process. In this case, in order to generate an auxiliary gaming state in which the number of rounds is selected, the process proceeds to the fanfare 1 middle processing.
In other words, the game control device 100 determines that a plurality of specific areas (first round selection) provided in the game area 32 based on the result of the variable display game being a predetermined special result mode (a big hit that is not a big hit for determining the number of rounds). Auxiliary game state generating means capable of generating an auxiliary game state that makes the passage of the game ball to the gate 91 and the second round selection gate 92) effective.

In the case of a big hit (first win) that occurs when the gaming state is not a short-time state, explanations such as selection of the number of rounds will be made, and in the case of a big hit (per consecutive run) that has occurred in other gaming states Since explanations are received, explanations are not given.
For this reason, when the big hit for selecting the number of rounds occurs in a gaming state that is not in the short-time state, the fanfare 1 hour is set longer than that in other gaming states, and the fanfare 1 hour is set in the gaming state. The special figure game flag including information is set based on the information.

  If the round number is a big hit (step A264; Y), it is not necessary to select the number of rounds using a round lottery random number, so the corresponding lottery random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0. (Step A267). Further, the fanfare 2 hours corresponding to the special prize opening information is saved in the special game process timer area (step A268), and the fanfare 2 / interval process transition setting process (step A269) is performed to display the special chart display process. Exit. In this case, in order not to generate an auxiliary game state for selecting the number of rounds, the process proceeds to fanfare 2 / interval processing. Thereby, the 2nd special game state which is a special game state which gives a predetermined game value to a player will occur.

If the result is out of order (steps A705 and A706; N), the process proceeds to FIG.
In this process, in place of the high probability fluctuation count update process (step A735) for managing the period of high probability state, the time shortening fluctuation count update process (step A270) for managing the time-short period period is performed.
In the time shortening variation number update process, when a predetermined big hit is made, a process for ending the time reduction state is performed by executing the special figure variation display game a predetermined number of times in the time reduction state after the special game state is ended.
In addition, in the gaming machine of this modification, there is a big hit (probability big hit) that becomes a high probability state after the end of the special gaming state and a big hit (normal big hit) that becomes a low probability state, and a high probability state is set Will continue until the next big hit.

[Big hit start setting process]
FIG. 100 shows the jackpot start setting process (step A263) in the special figure display process described above. In the jackpot start setting process, a part of the process performed in the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 shown in FIG. 49 is performed. In this modified example, the high probability variation frequency region for managing the period for the high probability state is not used, but the time reduction variation frequency region for managing the period for the short time state is used. A clearing process (step A281) is performed.

[Fanfare 1 mid-process transition setting process]
FIG. 101 shows the fanfare 1 mid-process transition setting process (step A266) in the special figure display mid-process described above. In this fanfare 1 mid-process transition setting process, “3”, which is the process number related to fanfare 1 mid-process, is set (step A531), the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A532), and fanfare 1 The middle process transition setting process is terminated.

[Fanfare 2 / interval process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 102 shows fanfare 2 / interval process transition setting process 1 (step A269) in the special figure display process described above. In the fanfare 2 / interval process transition setting process 1, "5", which is the process number related to the fanfare 2 / interval process, is set (step A533), and the process number is saved in the special game process number area (step A533). A534).
Next, a signal related to the start of operation of the accessory continuous actuating device is saved in the test signal output data area (the accessory continuous actuating device operating signal is ON) (step A535), and the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A535). A536), the fanfare 2 / inter-interval process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Fanfare 1 middle treatment]
FIG. 103 (a) shows the fanfare 1 middle process (step A231) in the special figure game process described above. In the fanfare 1 mid-process, a gate passage waiting process transition setting process (step A541) is performed.
As shown in FIG. 103 (b), in this gate pass waiting process transition setting process, “4”, which is the process number related to the gate pass waiting process, is set (step A542), and the special figure game process number area is processed. The number is saved (step A543), and the process for setting transition to waiting for gate passage processing is terminated.
As will be described later, the waiting process for passing through the gate has an end condition that the game ball passes the first round selection gate 91 or the second round selection gate 92, so the special game processing timer remains 0 here. No setting is made at, and the passing of the game ball can be checked at every interruption.

[Processing waiting to pass through the gate]
FIG. 104 shows the gate pass waiting process (step A232) in the special figure game process described above. In this waiting-for-gate processing, first, it is determined whether there is an input to the round selection gate switch 1 (first round selection gate switch 91a) provided in the first round selection gate 91 (step A551).
When there is an input to the round selection gate switch 1 (step A551; Y), the round number selection table 1 in which the type of round number and the selection probability are defined is set (step A552), which is a big hit in FIG. Is determined (step A555).

When there is no input to the round selection gate switch 1 (step A551; N), it is determined whether there is an input to the round selection gate switch 2 (second round selection gate switch 92a) provided in the second round selection gate 92. Determine (step A553).
If there is no input to the round selection gate switch 2 (step A553; N), the process of waiting for the gate to pass is terminated.
When there is an input to the round selection gate switch 2 (step A553; Y), the round number selection table 2 in which the type of round number and the selection probability are defined is set (step A554). (Step A555).

If it is a big hit in the special figure 1 (step A555; Y), a random number is loaded from the special figure 1 round lottery random number storage area (for holding number 1) (step A556), and the loaded area is cleared to 0 ( Step A557), a sorting process for selecting the number of rounds from the set round number selection table and the loaded random number is performed (step A560).
If it is not a big hit in the special figure 1 (step A555; N), a random number is loaded from the special figure 2 round lottery random number storage area (for holding number 1) (step A558), and the loaded area is cleared to 0. (Step A559) A distribution process for selecting the number of rounds from the set round number selection table and the loaded random number is performed (step A560).
In the present modification, the round number selection table 1 is defined such that 10R is selected with a probability of 100%. The round number selection table 2 is defined so that 4R and 16R are selected with a probability of 50%.

Thereafter, the round number upper limit value obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit area (step A561), and the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value corresponding to the distribution result is acquired and rounded. Save to the LED pointer area (step A562).
Further, a fanfare 2 command corresponding to the round number upper limit value is prepared (step A563), and an effect command setting process (step A564) is performed.
Then, the big hit fanfare time corresponding to the round number upper limit value is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A565), the fanfare 2 / interval process transition setting process 1 is performed (step A566), and the gate waiting process is performed. Exit.

  In addition, when there is an input simultaneously in the round selection gate switches 1 and 2, priority is given to the input from the round selection gate switch 1, but priority is given to the input from the round selection gate switch 2. good.

In other words, the game value determining means capable of determining the game value given to the player in the special game state based on the fact that the game control device 100 has passed through any specific area during the occurrence of the auxiliary game state. Make.
Then, a first special game state, which is a special game state in which the game value determined by the game value determination means is given to the player, is generated.

[Fanfare 2 / In-interval processing]
FIG. 105 shows fanfare 2 / inter-interval processing (step A233) in the above-described special figure game processing. In the fanfare 2 / interval processing, part of the processing performed in the fanfare / interval processing shown in FIG. 51 is performed.
Since the opening mode is not switched according to the number of rounds, the distribution is performed only based on whether or not the big winning opening information is long opening data (step A571), and the big winning opening information is long opening. If it is not data (step A571; N), that is, if it is 2R big hit, it is short open, and if the big prize opening information is long open data (step A571; Y), that is, if it is not 2R big hit, it is long. It is open.
By performing the fanfare 2 / interval processing, a special gaming state is generated. That is, the game control device 100 serves as special game state generation means capable of generating a special game state.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process]
Also, instead of the process for setting a process for opening a winning a prize opening shown in FIG. 52, a process setting process for a process for opening a winning a prize opening shown in FIG. 106 is performed.
In the special winning opening opening process transition setting process, the processing number to be set is changed to “6” when the special drawing game processing number corresponding to the special winning opening opening process is changed in the special figure game process. (Step A572).

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
Further, in place of the process for opening a prize winning opening shown in FIG. 53, the process for opening a prize winning opening shown in FIG. 107 is performed.
In this special winning opening opening process, first, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening information is long opening data (step A573). If the big winning opening information is not long opening data (step A573; N). In other words, if it is 2R big hit, the special winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process (step A1011) is performed without setting the command, and the special winning opening open process is terminated.
If the special winning opening information is long opening data (step A573; Y), that is, if it is other than 2R big hit, a corresponding command is set, and the special winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing (step A1011). ) To finish the process during opening of the big prize opening.
As for the ending command, an ending command corresponding to the special winning opening release information set according to the stop symbol number (type of jackpot) is prepared (step A574).

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
Further, in place of the big winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting process shown in FIG. 54, the big winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting process shown in FIG. 108 is performed.
In the special winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process, the processing number to be set is changed to “7” in accordance with the special figure game processing number corresponding to the winning prize remaining ball process in the special figure game process. (Step A575).

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing]
Also, instead of the big winning opening remaining ball processing shown in FIG. 55, the big winning opening remaining ball processing shown in FIG. 109 is performed. In this special winning opening remaining ball process, a part of the process performed in the special winning opening remaining ball process shown in FIG. 55 is performed.
If it is not the final round (step A1101; N), the interval time is saved in the special game process timer area (step A1109), the fanfare 2 / interval process transition setting process 2 (step A583) is performed, The remaining sphere process is terminated.
If it is the final round (step A1101; Y), an ending time table is set (step A581), the ending time corresponding to the special winning opening information is acquired and saved in the special game timer area ( In step A582), the big hit end process transition setting is performed (step A1114), and the big winning opening remaining ball process is ended.

[Fanfare 2 / interval process transition setting process 2]
FIG. 110 shows fanfare 2 / inter-interval process transition setting process 2 (step A583) in the above-described winning prize remaining ball process. The fanfare 2 / inter-interval process transition setting process 2 performs the same process as the fanfare / inter-interval process transition setting process 2 shown in FIG. The corresponding special game process “5” is set (step A584).

[Big jackpot end process transition setting process]
Moreover, it replaces with the big hit end process transfer setting process shown in FIG. 57, and the big hit end process transfer setting process shown in FIG. 111 is performed.
In the jackpot end process transition setting process, the process number to be set is changed to “8” in accordance with the change of the special figure game process number corresponding to the jackpot end process in the special figure game process (step A585). ).

[Big hits end processing]
Also, instead of the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 58, the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 112 is performed. In this jackpot end process, first, it is determined whether the probability variation determination data is high probability data (step A591).
If the probability variation determination data is not high probability data (step A591; N), jackpot end setting processing 1 (step A592) is performed, and processing subsequent to step A1204 is performed.
When the probability variation determination data is high probability data (step A591; Y), the big hit end setting process 2 (step A593) is performed, and the processes after step A1204 are performed.
Note that the processing of steps A1214 to A1218 is not performed.

[Big jackpot end setting 1]
Further, instead of the jackpot end setting process 1 shown in FIG. 59, the jackpot end setting process 1 shown in FIG. 113 is performed. In the jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal related to the start of the time-short state is saved in the external information output data area (step A621), and a signal related to the start of the time-short state (for example, the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is turned ON, The special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal is turned ON and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A622).

Next, the number of the time is saved in the game state display number area (step A623), the common figure high probability & ordinary power support flag is saved in the ordinary game mode flag area (step A624), and the special game mode The flag with special figure low probability & short time is saved in the flag area (step A625).
Thereafter, an initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the time shortening variation number area (step A626), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is ended.
In this case, a big hit that becomes a low probability state after the end of the special gaming state such as a round selection type normal jackpot occurs, the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is a low probability state, and the special gaming state From the end of the game, the time is reduced until 100 special figure variation display games are executed.

[Big jackpot end setting 2]
Also, instead of the jackpot end setting process 2 shown in FIG. 60, the jackpot end setting process 2 shown in FIG. 114 is performed. In the jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal related to the start of a high probability is saved in the external information output data area (step A631), and a signal related to the start of a high probability (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned ON, the special Symbol 2 high probability state signal ON, special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal ON, special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal ON, normal symbol 1 high probability state signal ON) are saved in the test signal output data area (Step A632).

Next, the number at the time of high probability is saved in the game state display number area (step A633), the common figure high probability & ordinary power support flag is saved in the ordinary game mode flag area (step A634), and the special game The special flag high probability & short time flag is saved in the mode flag area (step A635).
Thereafter, the time shortening variation count area is cleared to 0 (step A636), and the big hit end setting process 2 is ended.
In this case, a big hit that becomes a high probability state occurs after the end of the special gaming state such as 2R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit, round selection type probability variation big hit, and the next big hit occurs after the special gaming state ends. The probability state is changed to the high probability state and the time reduction state.

With the above processing, a game in which the number of rounds is selected according to the auxiliary game state is enabled.
The round number selection table is selected based on the jackpot symbol so that the auxiliary game state is generated even if the number of rounds is determined and the same number of rounds is selected regardless of which round selection gate is passed. You may do it.
Further, the auxiliary game state method may be any method as long as it can be selected according to the player's intention. For example, only one round selection gate may be used, and the number of rounds may be selected according to the timing at which a game ball is detected. In this case, what kind of selection is made when the game ball is detected is shown to the player.

  In addition to the result of the special figure change display game based on the hold and the probability state that brings the result as the prefetch information, the prefetch result of the round selection random number may be included. You may make it perform the prefetch effect like the embodiment and each modification which were made.

  Based on the above, a plurality of identification information fluctuates based on the winning of the game ball at the start winning port (start winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37) provided in the game area 32 where the launched game ball flows down. A game machine capable of generating a special game state that gives a predetermined game value to a player when a variable display game to be displayed is executed and the result of the variable display game is in a special result mode. Based on that the result of the above became a predetermined special result mode, the passing of the game ball to a plurality of specific areas (first round selection gate 91, second round selection gate 92) provided in the game area 32 is made effective. A player in a special game state based on an auxiliary game state generation means (game control device 100) capable of generating an auxiliary game state and a game ball passing through any specific area during the generation of the auxiliary game state A game value determining means (game control device 100) capable of determining a game value to be given, and a special game state generating means (game control device 100) capable of generating a special game state. When the result of the variable display game is a predetermined special result mode, the generation means gives the player the game value determined by the game value determination means based on the passage of the game ball in the specific area. While it is possible to generate one special gaming state, if the result of the variable display game is a special result mode that is not a predetermined special result mode, the special result mode is derived in advance. It is possible to generate a second special game state in which the determined game value is given to the player.

  Therefore, interest can be enhanced by the process of determining the gaming value in the auxiliary gaming state.

  The specific area includes a first specific area (second round selection gate 92) and a second specific area (first round selection gate 91) that have different game value determination modes by the game value determination means (game control device 100). The game value determination means performs a predetermined lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the first specific area, and the game value to be given to the player is higher than the first game value. One of the low second game value is selected based on the lottery result, the game value to be given to the player is lower than the first game value based on the passing of the game ball to the second specific area, and The third game value higher than the second game value is selected.

  Therefore, various aspects are included in the determination process of the game value, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

[Fifth Modification]
Next, a fifth modification of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described fourth modified example, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and is mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine according to the present modification is configured to determine the number of rounds set when a game ball passes through each of the first round selection gate 91 and the second round selection gate 92 at the start of variation.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
In this modification, a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 115 is performed instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. In this special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, when the number of rounds is not a stop symbol (step A251; N), random numbers are loaded from the special figure 1 round lottery random number storage area (for holding number 1) (step A641).

Next, the round number selection table 1 is set (step A642), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the loaded random number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit saving area 1 (step A643). The number of rounds selected here is the number of rounds set when the game ball passes through the first round selection gate 91, and is always 10R in this modification.
Further, the round number selection table 2 is set (step A644), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the loaded random number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit saving area 2 (step A645). The number of rounds selected here is the number of rounds set when the game ball passes through the second round selection gate 92, and is selected with a probability of 50% from 4R and 16R.

In step A418, instead of preparing the special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern, a special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the round number information is prepared (step A646).
Also, a process of clearing the special figure 1 round lottery random number storage area (for holding number 1) (step A647) is performed.
Although not shown in the figure, the special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process also performs the processing of steps A641 to A645 using the random number for special symbol 2 when the number of rounds is not the stop symbol fixed, and the stop symbol pattern, round A process for preparing a decoration special figure command corresponding to the number information (step A646) and a process for clearing the special figure 2 round lottery random number storage area (for holding number 1) are performed.

By performing such processing, the number of rounds when the game ball passes through the first round selection gate 91 and the number of rounds when the game ball passes through the second round selection gate 92 are displayed as a special figure change display. It will be decided at the start of the game.
That is, a game in which the game control device 100 selects a game value to be given to a player from among a plurality of types of game values when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result mode at the start of the variable display game. It serves as a value selection tool.

Furthermore, the determined number of rounds is also transmitted to the effect control device 300 by a decoration special drawing command, and the effect control device 300 performs an effect related to the number of rounds (game value) from the start of the auxiliary gaming state based on this command. It has become. Thereby, the range of production can be expanded and the interest of the game can be improved.
In other words, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect executing means capable of executing an effect related to the game value set by the game value selecting means.

FIG. 116 shows an example of the special decoration command prepared in the process of preparing the special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the round number information (step A646).
The 2R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot are stop symbols for determining the number of rounds, and there is only one decorative special figure command corresponding to each.
In addition, the jackpots for selecting the number of rounds by round lottery random numbers include round selection type probable jackpots that become a high probability state after the end of the special gaming state, and round selection type normal jackpots that become the low probability state after the end of the special gaming state. There is.
In the round selection type probable big hit and the round selection type normal big hit, the number of rounds set when the game ball passes through the first round selection gate 91 is only 10R, and the game ball passes through the second round selection gate 92 Since there are 4R and 16R in the number of rounds set at the time, the special decoration drawing commands corresponding to these combinations are set.
Such a decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the production control device 300 at the start of the special drawing fluctuation display game, whereby the production control device 300 can grasp the number of rounds.

Note that the upper 4 bits of the decoration special drawing command are numbers indicating the series of the same model, and “1” in FIG. 116 indicates that it is the first model of the series, and “2” is displayed for the second model of the series. Become.
This number is based on the value of the model designation command, and this number is displayed when the power is turned on with the RAM initialization, so that the series can be specified.
The effect control device 300 gives priority to the value of the decoration special figure command when the value of the upper 4 bits is different from the series number designated by the model designation command during the game. The internal memory of the effect control device 300 is updated. As a result, for example, if the production control device 300 is reset due to noise or the like and the model information is lost, the model information can be reset by sending a special decoration command, and the gaming machine is turned on. Even if it is not corrected, it is possible to return automatically.

[Processing waiting to pass through the gate]
In this modification, the gate waiting process shown in FIG. 117 is performed instead of the gate passing process shown in FIG. In this waiting-for-gate processing, steps A552 and A554 to 560 regarding the lottery for the number of rounds are not performed.
When there is an input to the round selection gate switch 1 (step A551; Y), the round number upper limit value is loaded from the round number upper limit saving area 1 (step A651), and this round number upper limit value is loaded into the round number upper limit area. (Step A653).
When there is an input to the round selection gate switch 2 (step A553; Y), the round number upper limit value is loaded from the round number upper limit saving area 2 (step A652), and this round number upper limit value is set to the round number upper limit value. Save in the value area (step A653).

  Thereafter, a round LED pointer corresponding to the set round number upper limit value is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step A654), and the processing after step A563 is performed.

[Fanfare 2 / interval process transition setting process 1]
In this modification, the fanfare 2 / inter-interval process transition setting process 1 shown in FIG. 118 is performed instead of the fanfare 2 / inter-interval process transition setting process 1 shown in FIG. In the fanfare 2 / interval process transition setting process 1, a process of clearing the round number upper limit saving area 1 (step A661) and a process of clearing the round number upper limit saving area 2 (step A662) are performed.

  From the above, at the start of the variable display game, a game value selection means for selecting a game value to be given to the player when the result of the variable display game is in a special result mode from among a plurality of types of game values (Game control device 100) and effect execution means (effect control device 300) capable of executing effects related to the game value set by the game value selection means, and the game value determination means (game control device 100) is variable. When the result of the display game is a predetermined special result mode, a game is played in the first special game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific area (first round selection gate 91, second round selection gate 92). The game value given to the player is determined as the game value selected by the game value selection means.

  Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect relating to the game value before the game value is determined in the auxiliary game state, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

In the auxiliary game state, the number of rounds when a game ball is passed through each round selection gate may be suggested and notified, or a lottery is performed based on the game ball passing through the round selection gate. You may make it perform as if it is.
Further, since the lottery for lottery and the lottery for the number of rounds are separate lotteries, each round selection gate can be selected from the display on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 or the display of the special figure variation display game. The number of rounds set when a game ball passes through cannot be estimated. However, there is a relationship between the jackpot lottery and the lottery lottery, and each round selection gate is played based on the display on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 or the display of the decorative special figure fluctuation display game. The number of rounds set when the ball passes may be recognized or estimated.

  Further, the auxiliary game state may be generated even if the number of rounds is determined, and the same number of rounds may be selected regardless of which round selection gate is passed.

  The gaming machine 10 as described above executes a variable display game that displays a plurality of pieces of identification information in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball at a start winning port (start winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37). A gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state that gives a player a predetermined gaming value when the result of the game is a special result, and the probability state in which the special result occurs includes a normal probability state, There is a high probability state higher than the normal probability state, and the high probability state can be generated after the special game state is completed, and the variable display game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening A start storage means (game control device 100) that can store a right up to a predetermined upper limit number as a start storage, and stores a predetermined random number corresponding to the start storage, and a predetermined random number stored in the start storage means The start-up Pre-determining means (game control device 100) capable of making a determination prior to the execution of the variable display game based on, and pre-notice producing means (production control device 300) capable of executing a prior notice effect. The pre-determination means is configured to be able to determine a predetermined random number corresponding to the start-up memory based on a determination value corresponding to the normal probability state and a determination value corresponding to the high probability state. The prior notice effect means indicates that the pre-determination result information including the pre-determination result by the pre-determination means and the information that can identify the probability state that brings about the pre-determination result indicates that a special result occurs only in the high probability state. In the case of information, it is possible to restrict the execution of a specific advance notice effect indicating that the special result will occur.

  Therefore, it is possible to prevent a contradiction in the production due to a change in the probability state and to reduce the player's expectation and interest, and to improve the interest of the game.

  The invention according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the start winning port is in a first start winning port (start winning port 36), a winning possible state and a winning impossible state A convertible second start winning opening (ordinary variable winning apparatus 37), and the starting storage means (game control apparatus 100) executes a variable display game based on winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening A first starting storage means (game control device 100) for storing a predetermined random number corresponding to the starting memory, and a second starting winning award Based on the winning of the game ball, the right to execute the variable display game can be stored as a second start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number, and a second start memory that stores a predetermined random number corresponding to the start memory Means (game control device 100) At the time of execution capable of determining a predetermined random number stored in the first start storage means and the second start storage means based on a determination value corresponding to the probability state at the time of execution of the variable display game based on the start storage Determination means (game control device 100), priority control means (game control device 100) for executing the variable display game based on the second start memory in preference to the variable display game based on the first start memory, and a predetermined notice A preliminary announcement production means (production control device 300) capable of producing the production, and the preliminary announcement production means (production control device 300) can regulate the execution of the specific preliminary announcement production related to the first start memory. When the execution time determination result by the execution time determination means is information indicating that a special result is generated, the advance notice effecting means performs the first start by the prior notice effect means. Even if the execution of a particular pre-announcement attraction about 憶 is restricted, it is possible to perform specific announcement attraction indicating that the special results.

  Therefore, even when execution of a specific advance notice effect is restricted, it is possible to execute a specific notice effect indicating that a special result is generated based on the execution time determination result by the execution time determination means. Because there is, you can improve the interest of the game.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above-described embodiment as a gaming machine, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. It can be applied to all gaming machines that use this game ball. In addition, the configurations of the above-described modifications can be applied in appropriate combination.

  In addition, it should be considered that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

10 gaming machine 36 start prize opening (first start prize opening)
37 Ordinary Fluctuation Prize Winners (Startup Prize, Second Start Prize)
100 Game control device (starting storage means, pre-determining means, first starting storage means, second starting storage means, execution time determining means, priority control means)
300 effect control device (preliminary notice effect means, notice effect means)

Claims (1)

Based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening, a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner is executed, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result, a predetermined game value is given to the player. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state to be granted,
The probability state in which the special result occurs includes a normal probability state and a high probability state higher than the normal probability state, and is configured to generate the high probability state after the special gaming state ends.
Based on the winning of the game ball at the starting winning opening, the right to execute the variable display game can be stored as a starting memory up to a predetermined upper limit number, and a starting random number corresponding to the starting storage is stored Storage means;
Random numbers acquired in correspondence with the start memory before the variable display game based on the start memory is executed , the determination value corresponding to the normal probability state and the determination value corresponding to the high probability state And a pre-determining means for generating a pre-determination result by making a determination based on
A prior notice directing means capable of executing a prior notice directing ,
Before article before announcement attraction means,
Read the predetermination result information including the predetermination result by the predetermination means and information that can identify the probability state that brings the predetermination result from the storage area of the predetermination result information,
When the read prior determination result information is information indicating that a special result occurs only in the high probability state, regardless of whether or not the variable display game based on the start-up memory becomes the special result The gaming machine is characterized in that the pre-notification effect lottery is performed by replacing the value of the read pre-determination result information with a result value that does not become the special result.

Images